1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
17 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
19 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
20 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
21 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
22 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
24 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
28 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
29 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
31 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
32 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
34 % for customized page headers/footers
35 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
37 % change header rule width
38 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
40 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
41 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
42 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
44 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
46 % the following added in Bahasa Indonesia Version
47 % to follow the most common style (centered chapters) in Indonesia
48 \addtokomafont{chapterentry}{\centering}
49 \addtokomafont{chapter}{\centering}
51 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
52 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "Petunjuk Penggunaan LyX"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation indent
133 \paragraph_indentation default
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes false
141 \output_changes false
148 Petunjuk Penggunaan \SpecialChar LyX
153 oleh Tim \SpecialChar LyX
158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
160 Petunjuk dalam Bahasa Indonesia ini disunting oleh
165 Apabila anda mempunyai komentar atau menemukan kesalahan yang perlu dikoreksi,
166 silakan kirim komentar ke mailing list \SpecialChar LyX
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 \begin_inset Note Note
197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
198 Versi PDF terkini dapat diperoleh disini:
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
205 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
213 \begin_layout Standard
214 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
215 LatexCommand tableofcontents
222 \begin_layout Chapter
226 \begin_layout Section
227 Apakah \SpecialChar LyX
231 \begin_layout Standard
233 adalah suatu sistem pengaturan dokumen yang digunakan untuk menyiapkan
234 manuskrip makalah, buku, surat bisnis, proposal, juga dapat digunakan untuk
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
247 menggunakan paradigma bahasa perubahan sebagai inti dari gaya penyuntingan,
248 yaitu apabila anda menulis judul bab, maka anda hanya perlu menandainya
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
257 , tidak perlu menyatakan
258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
261 Huruf Tebal, ukuran 17
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 pt, rata kiri, jarak ke baris berikutnya 5
266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
275 yang akan mengatur semuanya itu.
276 Anda hanya perlu memikirkan tentang isi dan konsep, bukan bagaimana pengaturan
280 \begin_layout Standard
281 Filosopi ini dijelaskan pada buku panduan
282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
294 Apabila belum membacanya, sangat disarankan anda membacanya terlebih dahulu
295 sebelum melanjutkan mempelajari buku panduan ini.
298 \begin_layout Standard
300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
311 , selain menjelaskan tentang filosofi \SpecialChar LyX
312 , juga menjelaskan tentang format
313 penulisan yang digunakan di semua buku panduan.
314 Oleh karena itu anda perlu meluangkan waktu untuk membacanya terlebih dahulu.
315 Buku panduan lain yang disarankan dipelajari sebelum membaca buku panduan
316 ini adalah buku panduan
317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
331 \begin_layout Section
332 Bagaimana Tampilan \SpecialChar LyX
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 Seperti umumnya aplikasi program lain, \SpecialChar LyX
338 mempunyai kotak menu utama di bagian
340 Dibagian bawahnya ada kotak bantuan yang berisi satu kotak pilihan serta
341 berbagai tombol bantuan.
342 Selain itu, ada gulungan vertikal dan area kerja utama untuk menyunting
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 Ada satu hal yang perlu anda ketahui, anda tidak akan menemukan gulungan
349 Hal ini bukanlah karena kutu program atau fitur yang terlupakan, tetapi
350 merupakan kesengajaan.
351 Teks yang ditulis dalam area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
352 akan selalu diteruskan di baris bawahnya
353 apabila melewati batas jendela kerja.
354 Oleh karena itu, \SpecialChar LyX
355 tidak memerlukan gulungan horisontal, cukup menggunakan
357 Mungkin ada tiga alasan mengapa anda masih memerlukan gulungan horisontal.
358 Yang pertama adalah apabila anda mempunyai gambar yang berukuran besar.
359 Untuk mengatasi hal ini, yang anda perlu lakukan adalah mengatur skala
360 gambar di \SpecialChar LyX
361 agar bisa ditampilan seluruhnya di area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
363 Alasan yang kedua dan ketiga adalah berkaitan dengan tabel dan persamaan
364 yang melebihi area kerja.
365 Untuk tabel, anda bisa menggunakan tombol panah untuk menggeser kursor
366 dalam tabel pada arah horisontal.
367 Namun demikian, hal ini belum dapat dilakukan untuk persamaan yang panjang
368 dan melebihi area kerja.
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Penjelasan ringkas tentang semua menu \SpecialChar LyX
373 serta tombol bantuan yang ada, silahkan
379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
381 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
386 Hampir semua menu dapat dipahami dengan sendirinya dari nama menu.
387 Namun demikian anda dapat memperoleh penjelasan lanjut pada sub-bab dalam
393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
395 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
403 \begin_layout Section
407 \begin_layout Standard
408 Bantuan yang disediakan adalah dalam bentuk buku panduan \SpecialChar LyX
414 buku panduan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
416 Caranya sangat mudah, dari menu
420 , kemudian pilihlah buku panduan yang ingin anda baca.
423 \begin_layout Section
424 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LyX
426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
428 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
435 \begin_layout Standard
436 Ada beberapa fitur \SpecialChar LyX
437 dapat diatur dari dalam \SpecialChar LyX
438 , tanpa melakukan perubahan
439 atau menyunting secara langsung pada berkas konfigurasinya.
441 mampu memeriksa sistem anda untuk melihat perangkat lunak, class dokumen
443 , serta paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
445 Dengan kemampuan ini, \SpecialChar LyX
446 menggunakannya untuk menentukan pengaturan bawaan
452 \begin_inset Index idx
455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
462 Walaupun pengaturan konfigurasi bawaan sudah dilakukan ketika proses instalasi
464 , anda masih mempunyai keleluasaan untuk menambah program tambahan secara
465 lokal, misalnya \SpecialChar LaTeX
466 class, yang sebelumnya belum dikenal oleh \SpecialChar LyX
468 Untuk memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
469 untuk memeriksa ulang sistem anda, maka anda perlu menggunakan
472 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
476 \begin_inset Index idx
479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
480 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
487 Setelah proses konfigurasi ulang, anda harus menjalankan ulang \SpecialChar LyX
489 n semua perubahan diterapkan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
493 \begin_layout Section
494 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LaTeX
496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
498 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
505 \begin_layout Standard
506 Anda dapat menyunting dokumen dalam \SpecialChar LyX
507 tanpa instalasi \SpecialChar LaTeX
508 , namun demikian anda
509 tidak akan bisa melihat atau mebuat PDF atau mencetak dokumen tanpa \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 Apabila dokumen anda menggunakan DocBook, maka anda akan dapat menghasilkan
512 PDF atau yang setara, selain itu semua dokumen dalam DocBook akan mempunyai
513 keluaran sebagai plain text atau XHTML.
516 \begin_layout Standard
517 Beberapa class dokumen menggunakan kombinasi class \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 atau DocBook atau paket
521 Anda dapat menggunakan class dokumen tersebut walaupun anda tidak memiliki
522 berkas yang seharusnya sudah dipasang.
523 Tentu saja anda tidak dapat melihat hasil keluaran tanpa semua berkas terpasang
527 \begin_layout Standard
528 Semua paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
529 yang sudah dideteksi ada dalam sistem anda dapat dilihat melalui
532 Bantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
551 Apabila ada paket-paket yang belum terpasang, anda perlu melakukan instalasi
552 paket kemudian konfigurasi ulang (menu
554 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
562 \begin_inset Note Note
565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
566 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
567 Code box prevent that the term
568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
576 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
577 More about \SpecialChar TeX
578 Code is described in section
583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
585 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
589 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
590 is explained in section
595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
597 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
607 \begin_inset Index idx
610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
611 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
617 Informasi tentang bagaimana melakukan instalasi tambahan paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
619 lihat sub-bab 5.1 dari buku panduan
621 Perubahan dan Pengaturan
626 \begin_layout Chapter
627 Bagaimana Menggunakan \SpecialChar LyX
631 \begin_layout Section
632 Dasar Penggunaan Berkas
633 \begin_inset Index idx
636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
645 \begin_layout Standard
646 Semua penggunaan berkas dapat dimulai dari menu
650 serta ada di kotak bantuan dalam bentuk ikon tombol bantuan.
651 Beberapa menu yang berkaitan dengan berkas adalah:
654 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \begin_layout Itemize
732 \begin_layout Itemize
742 \begin_layout Itemize
752 \begin_layout Itemize
758 \begin_layout Itemize
764 \begin_layout Itemize
770 \begin_layout Standard
771 Secara umum, hampir semua operasi berkas mirip dengan yang ada di pengolah
773 Hanya saja di \SpecialChar LyX
774 ada sedikit perbedaan.
775 Apabila membuka berkas baru dari The
777 Berkas\SpecialChar menuseparator
779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
788 bukan hanya menuntun anda untuk memberi nama berkas tetapi juga memilih
789 templet yang akan anda gunakan.
790 Dengan memilih templet secara otomatis akan mengatur fitur utama tataletak
791 dokumen, sedangkan fitur lainnya dapat anda atur sendiri.
792 Templet mungkin menggunakan kelas dokumen tertentu (lihat subbab
797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
799 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
806 \begin_layout Standard
823 sangat berguna apabila anda bersama teman-teman anda menyunting berkas
828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
829 Apabila anda akan melakukan hal ini, anda perlu mempelajari fitur Kontrol
830 Versi yang ditulis di buku panduan
834 \SpecialChar endofsentence
849 akan memuat ulang dokumen dari cakra.
850 Anda dapat menggunakan operasi
858 untuk mengabaikan perubahan yang sudah anda lakukan dan mengembalikan ke
859 berkas terakhir yang anda simpan.
860 Dengan operasi berkas
868 anda dapat mendaftarkan catatan perubahan pada dokumen sehingga orang lain
869 akan dapat mengenali perubahan yang telah anda lakukan.
872 \begin_layout Section
873 Dasar Fitur Penyuntingan
874 \begin_inset Index idx
877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
886 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
893 \begin_layout Standard
894 Seperti pengolah kata modern lainnya, operasi penyuntingan dengan potong
895 dan tempel dalam \SpecialChar LyX
896 dapat dipraktekkan untuk teks, berupa karakter, kata,
897 maupun keseluruhan halaman atau bahkan lebih dari satu halaman.
898 Pada empat subbab berikut akan menjelaskan fitur penyuntingan yang ada
899 dalam \SpecialChar LyX
900 dan bagaimana memanfaatkannya.
901 Kita akan memulai dari potong dan tempel.
904 \begin_layout Standard
905 Seperti yang anda perkirakan, menu
909 dan kotak bantuan standar menyediakan perintah potong dan tempelkan serta
910 fitur suntingan lainnya.
911 Beberapa perintah suntingan perlu pembahasan khusus sehingga dikelompokkan
912 dalam pembahasan subbab berikutnya.
913 Perintah suntingan utama adalah:
916 \begin_layout Itemize
930 \begin_layout Itemize
944 \begin_layout Itemize
958 \begin_layout Itemize
962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
972 \begin_layout Itemize
976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
982 \begin_layout Itemize
986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
998 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1004 \begin_layout Standard
1005 Tiga perintah suntingan yang pertama dapat dipahami dari nama perintahnya
1007 Hanya ada beberapa catatan: apabila anda memilih dan menandai teks di dokumen
1008 anda, maka secara otomatis akan tersimpam di papan klip.
1017 juga berfungsi sebagai perintah
1022 Selain itu yang paling penting, jika anda memilih dan menandai teks, harap
1023 hati-hati: jika anda menekan salah satu tombol, maka \SpecialChar LyX
1025 yang anda pilih tadi dan mengganti dengan dengan huruf atau karakter yang
1027 Untuk mengembalikannya, anda perlu melakukan perintah
1031 agar teks dikembalikan seperti semula.
1034 \begin_layout Standard
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 Anda dapat dapat menyalin teks di \SpecialChar LyX
1045 juga dari program lainnya menggunakan
1064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1079 akan menampilkan daftar teks yang terakhir anda tempelkan.
1082 \begin_layout Standard
1085 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1100 akan menyisipkan teks yang tersimpan di papan klip sedemikian sehingga teks
1101 yang disisipkan dalam
1106 Paragraf baru akan dimulai apabila ada baris kosong.
1111 , teks disisipkan sebagai paragraf baru, dimana setiap ganti baris menjadi
1115 \begin_layout Standard
1116 \begin_inset Index idx
1119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1126 \begin_inset Index idx
1129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1137 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1156 akan membuka jendela dialog
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1169 Apabila anda sudah menemukan kata atau ekspresi yang anda cari, \SpecialChar LyX
1172 Dengan menekan tombol
1176 , kata yang ditemukan tadi akan digantikan dengan teks yang ada di area
1182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1190 Anda bisa meneruskan pencarian dengan menekan tombol Berikutnya.
1191 Jika anda menekan tombol
1196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1203 maka semua kata yang ada di dokumen akan diganti seketika secara otomatis.
1207 \begin_layout Standard
1208 Apabila anda ingin mempertimbangkan huruf besar/kecil, anda perlu menggunakan
1211 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1251 anda bisa mengatur pencarian yang anda inginkan.
1252 Apabila anda mengkatifkan pilihan
1255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1264 , maka pencarian kata
1265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1297 akan memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
1298 hanya mencari kata tersebut, misalnya pencarian
1299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1310 tidak akan menemukan
1311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1326 offers also an advanced
1329 \begin_inset space ~
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1338 feature that is described in sec.
1339 \begin_inset space ~
1343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1345 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1352 \begin_layout Standard
1353 Beberapa sisipan tambahan berformat, seperti nota, ambangan, dll., dapat
1355 Maknanya apabila tanda sisipan dihilangkan, maka isinya akan berubah menjadi
1357 Cara menguraikan sisipan tambahan adalah dengan meletakkan kursor di lokasi
1358 paling depan dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan tombol ketik
1362 atau meletakkan kursor di bagian akhir dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan
1370 \begin_layout Standard
1373 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1376 arg "inset-select-all"
1382 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1385 selects the whole document.
1388 \begin_layout Section
1389 Batalkan dan Kembalikan
1390 \begin_inset Index idx
1393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1400 \begin_inset Index idx
1403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1412 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1419 \begin_layout Standard
1420 Jika anda membuat kesalahan anda dapat dengan mudah membatalkannya.
1421 Anda perlu ke menu Suntingan
1423 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1426 atau dari tombol bantuan
1436 untuk membatalkan apa yang baru saja anda lakukan.
1438 mempunyai kemampunyan menyimpan dalam kapasitas yang besar untuk membatalkan/m
1440 Saat ini mekanisme simpanan maksimum adalah sampai 100
1441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1445 Apabila secara tidak sengaja anda melakukan proses pembatalan yang terlebih,
1446 anda bisa mengembalikannya dari menu
1448 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1451 atau dengan menekan tombol
1460 \begin_layout Standard
1461 Apabila anda mengembalikan perubahan sampai ke kondisi dokumen saat terakhir
1462 disimpan, status dokumen
1463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1470 tidak akan menjadi normal kembali seperti tidak ada perubahan.
1471 Hal ini karena anda sebenarnya melakukan perubahan pada dokumen.
1474 \begin_layout Standard
1483 dapat dilakukan untuk apa saja di \SpecialChar LyX
1485 Namun demikian proses
1493 pada teks tidak dilakukan untuk setiap karakter, tetapi berlaku untuk kumpulan
1497 \begin_layout Section
1499 \begin_inset Index idx
1502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1511 \begin_layout Standard
1512 Berikut ini adalah dasar pengunaan tetikus.
1515 \begin_layout Enumerate
1517 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1524 \begin_layout Itemize
1529 sekali di daerah jendela kerja \SpecialChar LyX
1531 Kursor akan mengikuti dan berkedip tepat di tempat anda menekan tombol
1536 \begin_layout Enumerate
1537 Memilih dan Menandai Teks
1538 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1545 \begin_layout Itemize
1550 kemudian seret tetikus.
1552 akan menandai teks mulai dari awal kursor sebelum diseret sampai ke tempat
1553 posisi kursor setelah diseret.
1556 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1559 untuk membuat salinan teks dalam simpanan \SpecialChar LyX
1563 \begin_layout Itemize
1564 Pindahkan kursor ke tempat lain kemudian tempelkan teks yang disimpan ke
1565 lokasi baru, menggunakan
1567 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1574 \begin_layout Enumerate
1575 Sisipan Tambahan (Catatan kaki, Nota, Ambangan, etc.)
1576 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1583 \begin_layout Standard
1588 pada sisipan tambahan untuk melihat propertinya.
1589 Anda perlu membaca pada bab tertentu di buku panduan ini untuk penjelasan
1594 \begin_layout Section
1596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1598 name "sec:Navigating"
1603 \begin_inset Index idx
1606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1615 \begin_layout Standard
1619 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1622 \begin_layout Itemize
1629 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1630 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1633 \begin_layout Itemize
1636 The `Outline', which is accessed either by the menu
1638 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
1641 or by the toolbar button
1644 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1650 \begin_layout Itemize
1653 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1655 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1658 and use the same menu to return to them.
1659 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1662 \begin_layout Standard
1668 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1673 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1674 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1677 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1678 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1679 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1680 your last editing position.
1683 \begin_layout Subsection
1689 \begin_layout Standard
1692 The Outline was known in earlier versions of \SpecialChar LyX
1694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1701 , since its original purpose was to display the document's table of contents.
1702 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1703 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1704 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1705 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1708 LatexCommand formatted
1709 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1713 ), or notes, or citations (see
1714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1715 LatexCommand formatted
1716 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1721 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1723 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1724 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1725 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1726 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1729 LatexCommand formatted
1730 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1734 ), or notes, or of citations (see
1735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1736 LatexCommand formatted
1737 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1742 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1746 \begin_layout Standard
1749 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline will in many cases open a context
1750 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1751 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1752 dialog and to modify the citation.
1753 Right-clicking a change will allow you to accept or reject it.
1757 \begin_layout Standard
1760 The `Filter' field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1762 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1763 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1771 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1774 \begin_layout Standard
1777 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1778 you further to control the display.
1783 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1784 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1789 option keeps it in the current view state.
1790 Keeping means that when you have e.
1791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1795 \begin_inset space \space{}
1798 the subsections of section
1799 \begin_inset space ~
1802 2 and 4 shown and click on section
1803 \begin_inset space ~
1806 3, the subsections of section
1807 \begin_inset space ~
1810 2 and 4 will still be shown.
1815 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1816 \begin_inset space ~
1820 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1830 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1833 \begin_layout Standard
1842 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1843 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1857 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1858 So, for example, you can move section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1866 2.4 or after section
1867 \begin_inset space ~
1872 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1885 (or the corresponding key bindings
1893 ) you can change the level of sections.
1894 So you can for example make section
1895 \begin_inset space ~
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1909 \begin_layout Section
1910 Masukan / Melengkapi Kata
1911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1913 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1918 \begin_inset Index idx
1921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1928 \begin_inset Index idx
1931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 \begin_layout Standard
1964 menyediakan data kata-kata untuk mempercepat proses penyuntingan dari hasil
1965 memindai kata-kata dalam dokumen yang sedang dibuka.
1966 Semua kata-kata yang ada dalam dokumen disimpan dalam basis data untuk
1967 digunakan melengkapi kata saat proses penyuntingan.
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1971 Pengaturan bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
1972 untuk melengkapi kata adalah dalam bentuk yang paling
1973 sederhana yaitu menggunakan tampilan kursor segitiga sebagai tanda bahwa
1974 sudah ada kata tersedia.
1975 Anda tinggal menggunakan tombol
1979 untuk melengkapi kata.
1980 Apabila ada beberapa pilihan kata tersedia, jendela kecil akan muncul dan
1981 menampilkan kata-kata tersebut.
1982 Anda dapat memilih dengan menggunakan tetikus atau tombol panah, kemudian
1983 menetapkan pilihan dengan menekan tombol
1991 \begin_layout Standard
1992 Untuk menghilangkan tanda melengkapi segitiga, anda perlu mengubah pengaturan
1995 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1998 kemudian dari seksi Penyuntingan
2000 \SpecialChar menuseparator
2002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2007 anda perlu melepaskan pilihan
2012 Sedangkan pengaturan
2014 Melengkapi kata otomatis pada baris
2016 , pilihan kata akan ditampilkan pada baris dibelakang posisi kursor.
2017 Untuk menerima saran kata yang muncul pada baris, anda cukup menekan tombol
2023 Apabila menggunakan pengaturan
2025 Menampilkan jendela pilihan otomatis
2027 , maka jendela pilihan kata akan selalu ditampilkan.
2029 mempunyai berbagai pengaturan melengkapi kata untuk yang sudah mahir.
2030 Pengaturan lanjut akan dapat ditemui di subbab.
2031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2037 reference "subsec:Input-Completion-Appendix"
2044 \begin_layout Section
2045 Gabungan tombol ketik
2046 \begin_inset Index idx
2049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2050 Gabungan tombol ketik
2056 \begin_inset Index idx
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2071 Gabungan tombol ketik
2075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2088 \begin_inset Index idx
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2122 \begin_layout Standard
2123 Ada dua peta utama untuk gabungan tombol ketik: CUA dan Emacs.
2124 Bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
2128 \begin_layout Standard
2129 Beberapa tombol ketik, seperti
2132 \begin_inset space ~
2140 \begin_inset space ~
2161 , sudah dapat berfungsi seperti yang anda harapkan.
2162 Namun demikian beberapa tombol ketik mungkin perlu dipahami fungsinya.
2165 \begin_layout Labeling
2166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2170 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2171 LatexCommand nomenclature
2173 description "Tombol ketik Tabulator"
2179 LyC tidak memfungsikan tombol ini sebagai hentian tab.
2180 Apabila anda belum memahaminya anda silahkan sekarang membaca terlebih
2182 \begin_inset space ~
2186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2188 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2195 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2200 \begin_inset space ~
2204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2206 reference "subsec:Lists"
2212 Apabila anda masih merasa belum mengerti juga, mungkin anda perlu membaca
2220 \begin_layout Labeling
2221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2225 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2226 LatexCommand nomenclature
2228 description "Tombol ketik Escape"
2234 Tombol ini digunakan sebagai
2235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2242 Secara umum tombol ini memang digunakan untuk membatalkan penyuntingan.
2243 Buku petunjuk ini juga akan membahas lebih terperinci tentang pemanfaatannya.
2246 \begin_layout Labeling
2247 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2257 \begin_inset space ~
2268 akan memindahkan kursor ke bagian awal dari baris dan tombol
2272 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir baris.
2273 Jika anda menggunakan peta Emacs,
2277 memindah ke bagian awal berkas sementara
2281 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir berkas.
2284 \begin_layout Standard
2285 Ada tiga tombol ketik pengubah:
2288 \begin_layout Labeling
2289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2294 (Diseluruh buku petunjuk Disingkat dengan
2295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2307 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2308 LatexCommand nomenclature
2310 description "Tombol ketik Control"
2314 ) Tombol ini mempunyai beberapa fungsi, tergantung dengan tombol ketik lain
2315 yang dikombinasikan:
2316 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2323 \begin_layout Itemize
2332 , akan menghapus seluruh kata bukan hanya satu karakter.
2335 \begin_layout Itemize
2344 , akan menggerakkan kursor satu kata kekiri atau kekanan.
2347 \begin_layout Itemize
2356 , akan memindah kursor ke bagian awal dokumen atau ke bagian akhir dokumen.
2360 \begin_layout Labeling
2361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2366 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2379 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2380 LatexCommand nomenclature
2382 description "Tombol ketik Shift"
2386 ) Tombol ini digunakan untuk menandai teks dengan tombol panah, dimulai
2387 dari posisi awal ke sampai berhenti menggerakkan.
2390 \begin_layout Labeling
2391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2396 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2409 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2410 LatexCommand nomenclature
2412 description "Tombol ketik Alt atau tombol ketik Meta"
2416 ) Sebagian besar papan ketik mempunyai tombol Alt, hanya beberapa papan
2417 ketik yang menggunakan tombol Meta.
2418 Jika anda memiliki keduanya, anda harus mencoba untuk memastikan tombol
2419 yang benar-benar aktif sebagai
2424 Tombol ini memiliki berbagai kegunaan selain berfungsi sebagai tombol
2429 Apabila anda menggunakan dengan kombinasi huruf dibawah menu, berarti and
2430 memilih menu tersebut.
2431 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2438 \begin_layout Standard
2439 Misalnya, urutan menekan tombol
2440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2446 \begin_inset space ~
2450 \begin_inset space ~
2456 \begin_inset space ~
2460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2463 akan membawa anda ke dialog
2464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2479 \begin_inset space ~
2485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2495 \begin_layout Standard
2500 memberikan daftar berbagai kombinasi perintah yang dinyatakan dengan tombol
2509 \begin_layout Standard
2510 Anda akan banyak menemukan berbagai gabungan tombol ketik serta pintasan
2511 yang digunakan di \SpecialChar LyX
2512 , karena setiap perintah gabungan akan menampilkan aksi
2513 yang anda lakukan serta pilihan gabungan tombol ketik lain yang bisa anda
2514 pilih di jendela status bawah.
2515 Notasi gabungan tombol ketik yang muncul akan mirip dengan yang digunakan
2516 di buku petunjuk, sehingga tidak membingungkan anda.
2517 Namun demikian untuk tombol Shift akan dinyatakan secara eksplisit, sehingga
2519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2534 diikuti dengan menulis huruf besar
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 Anda bisa melihat berbagai perintah gabungan melalui menu
2544 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2549 Penyuntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2551 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2556 seperti dijelaskan di subbab
2557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2563 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2570 \begin_layout Chapter
2573 \begin_inset Index idx
2576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2586 \begin_layout Section
2588 \begin_inset Index idx
2591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2600 \begin_layout Subsection
2604 \begin_layout Standard
2605 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2606 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2607 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2608 numbering schemes, and so on.
2609 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2610 and format the title of your document differently.
2613 \begin_layout Standard
2618 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2619 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2620 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2621 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2622 picks one for you by default.
2623 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2626 \begin_layout Standard
2627 Read on for info about the document classes you can choose from \SpecialChar LyX
2629 to adjust their properties.
2632 \begin_layout Subsection
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2646 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2653 \begin_layout Standard
2654 You can select a class using the
2656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2657 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2661 \begin_inset Index idx
2664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2671 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2679 \begin_layout Standard
2680 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2685 \begin_layout Description
2686 Article for basic articles
2689 \begin_layout Description
2690 Report for basic reports
2693 \begin_layout Description
2694 Book for writing a book
2697 \begin_layout Description
2698 Letter for US-style letters
2701 \begin_layout Standard
2702 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2703 only uses if you have installed
2704 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2705 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2706 distributions will include
2708 Here are some of the classes.
2709 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2711 Special Document Classes
2720 \begin_layout Description
2721 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2724 \begin_layout Description
2725 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2729 \begin_layout Description
2730 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2734 \begin_layout Description
2735 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2736 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2737 There are three article layouts available.
2738 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2739 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2740 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2741 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2746 sequential numbering
2747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2750 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2751 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2752 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2753 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2756 \begin_layout Description
2757 Beamer Layout for presentations
2760 \begin_layout Description
2761 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2762 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2763 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2764 with \SpecialChar LyX
2768 \begin_layout Description
2769 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2772 \begin_layout Description
2774 \begin_inset space ~
2777 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2780 \begin_layout Description
2781 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2784 \begin_layout Description
2785 Foils Used to make transparencies
2788 \begin_layout Description
2789 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2790 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2791 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2792 with \SpecialChar LyX
2796 \begin_layout Description
2797 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2798 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2801 \begin_layout Description
2802 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2811 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2812 (Is used by this document.)
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2819 \begin_layout Description
2820 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2823 \begin_layout Description
2828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2835 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2836 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2838 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Slides Used to make transparencies
2846 \begin_layout Description
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2851 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2852 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2855 \begin_layout Description
2856 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2859 \begin_layout Standard
2860 We won't go into any detail about how to use these different document classes
2862 You can find all the details about the non-standard classes in Chapter
2868 Here, we will settle with a list of some of the common properties of all
2869 of the document classes.
2872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2876 \begin_layout Standard
2877 New users are sometimes puzzled by the fact that many of the document classes
2880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 \begin_inset Index idx
2886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2903 Or they are surprised that, when they open e.
2904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2908 \begin_inset space ~
2915 template, they receive a warning saying that the document requires files
2916 that are not installed to produce output.
2917 So it seems that something is wrong.
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 But nothing is wrong.
2923 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2928 , are highly specialized.\SpecialChar LyX
2929 tries to support as many different types of documents
2930 as possible, and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
2931 with a growing number.
2932 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2933 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2934 by some document class.
2935 There are just too many of them.
2936 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2939 \begin_layout Standard
2940 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as `Unavailabl
2941 e', you need to install the appropriate package files.
2942 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2943 document class for a new file.
2945 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2950 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
2952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2959 manual for information on how to install them.
2960 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2966 \begin_layout Standard
2967 Although \SpecialChar LyX
2968 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
2969 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
2970 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
2971 class files to be used for dissertation
2972 s submitted to those universities.
2973 The \SpecialChar LyX
2974 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2976 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2979 \begin_inset space ~
2986 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2993 name "subsec:Modules"
2998 \begin_inset Index idx
3001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3010 \begin_layout Standard
3011 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3012 chosen document class.
3013 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3014 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3025 \begin_inset Index idx
3028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3035 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of the
3039 \begin_layout Standard
3040 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 packages that are not always installed by default.
3043 will warn you if you do not have the needed package.
3044 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3045 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3047 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3048 file without the missing package.
3049 If you want to be able to produce output, then you need to install the
3050 missing package and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3053 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3057 \begin_inset Index idx
3060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3061 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3071 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3080 manual for more information on installing needed packages.
3083 \begin_layout Standard
3084 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3094 will advise you about these things.
3102 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3106 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3111 \begin_inset Index idx
3114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3115 Document ! Local Layout
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3125 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3126 : They are intended to be used in
3127 a variety of different documents, and if you often find yourself needing
3128 the same sort of thing in different documents, you should consider writing
3129 a module for this purpose.
3130 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, and you
3131 find yourself wanting a specific inset or character style, but only that
3133 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3135 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3153 manual for information on how to use it.
3156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3160 \begin_layout Standard
3161 Each class has a default set of options.
3162 Here's a quick table describing them:
3165 \begin_layout Standard
3166 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3172 \begin_layout Standard
3174 \begin_inset Tabular
3175 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3176 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3635 \begin_layout Standard
3636 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3642 \begin_layout Standard
3643 You're probably also wondering what
3644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3648 \begin_inset space ~
3652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3656 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3657 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3662 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3667 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3677 headings, there are also
3685 headings, and so on.
3686 We'll describe these headings fully in section
3687 \begin_inset space ~
3691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3693 reference "subsec:Headings"
3700 \begin_layout Subsection
3702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3704 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3709 \begin_inset Index idx
3712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3721 \begin_inset Index idx
3724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3733 \begin_layout Standard
3734 The most important properties of documents classes are set in the menu
3736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3747 \begin_inset space ~
3752 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3754 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3755 doesn't support special options you want to
3756 use for your document.
3757 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3758 -class and its options, you have to read
3762 \begin_layout Standard
3769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3775 \begin_inset space ~
3780 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3781 You can choose between the following five options:
3784 \begin_layout Labeling
3785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3790 Use default page style of current class.
3793 \begin_layout Labeling
3794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3799 No page numbers or headings.
3802 \begin_layout Labeling
3803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3818 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3819 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3820 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3823 \begin_layout Labeling
3824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3829 This allows you to create fully customizable headers and footers if you
3830 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3836 \begin_inset Index idx
3839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 -packages ! fancyhdr
3847 How they are defined is explained in section
3848 \begin_inset space ~
3852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3854 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3861 \begin_layout Standard
3862 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3863 \begin_inset space ~
3867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3869 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3876 \begin_layout Subsection
3877 Paper Size and Orientation
3878 \begin_inset Index idx
3881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3882 Document ! Paper size
3888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3890 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3897 \begin_layout Standard
3898 You'll find the following options in the menu
3901 \begin_inset space ~
3908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3914 \begin_inset Index idx
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3926 \begin_layout Labeling
3927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3931 \begin_inset space ~
3936 What size paper to print on.
3940 \begin_layout Itemize
3946 \begin_layout Itemize
3956 \begin_layout Itemize
3962 \begin_layout Itemize
3968 \begin_layout Itemize
3974 \begin_layout Itemize
3980 \begin_layout Itemize
3986 \begin_layout Labeling
3987 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3992 To choose whether to output as
4003 \begin_layout Labeling
4004 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4008 \begin_inset space ~
4013 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4014 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4017 \begin_layout Subsection
4019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4021 name "subsec:Margins"
4026 \begin_inset Index idx
4029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4036 \begin_inset Index idx
4039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4048 \begin_layout Standard
4049 Paper margins are set in the menu
4051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4055 \begin_inset Index idx
4058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 \begin_layout Standard
4068 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings.
4069 Because KOMA-Script calculates then the printspace automatically by taking
4070 the paper format and the font size into account.
4073 \begin_layout Subsection
4077 \begin_layout Standard
4078 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4084 That includes the paragraph environments.
4085 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4086 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4087 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4089 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4098 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4100 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4101 will either need to create a new style yourself or else to convert these
4102 paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
4105 \begin_layout Section
4106 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4107 \begin_inset Index idx
4110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4111 Paragraph ! Indentation
4119 \begin_layout Subsection
4121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4123 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4130 \begin_layout Standard
4131 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4132 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4135 \begin_layout Standard
4136 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4137 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4138 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4139 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4143 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4149 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4150 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4151 language than English.
4153 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the used language.
4156 \begin_layout Standard
4157 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4158 and text — in fact, all of the spacings for just about everything are pre-coded
4159 into \SpecialChar LyX
4161 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4164 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4166 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4167 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4168 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4175 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4176 goes to produce a printable file.
4181 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4183 gives you the ability to globally change
4187 of these pre-coded spacings.
4188 We'll explain more later.
4191 \begin_layout Subsection
4192 Paragraph Separation
4193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4195 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4200 \begin_inset Index idx
4203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4204 Paragraph ! Separation
4212 \begin_layout Standard
4213 To separate paragraphs, select
4224 \begin_inset space ~
4231 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4235 \begin_inset Index idx
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4244 to indent paragraphs or add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4245 The size of the skips can be defined in the dialog, for the indentation
4246 you have to add this line to your document preamble:
4249 \begin_layout Standard
4259 \begin_layout Standard
4260 where length is a value in one of the units listed in Appendix
4261 \begin_inset space ~
4265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4267 reference "cap:Units"
4272 The default length is 30
4273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4279 \begin_layout Subsection
4283 \begin_layout Standard
4284 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4287 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4289 \begin_inset space ~
4294 dialog and toggle the
4297 \begin_inset space ~
4302 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4305 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4309 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4310 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4314 \begin_layout Standard
4315 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4316 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4319 \begin_layout Subsection
4321 \begin_inset Index idx
4324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4325 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4333 \begin_layout Standard
4336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4352 dialog you can set the line spacing in the submenu
4355 \begin_inset space ~
4364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4365 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4371 \begin_inset Index idx
4374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4376 -packages ! setspace
4381 installed to use this feature.
4389 \begin_layout Section
4390 Paragraph Environments
4391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4393 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4398 \begin_inset Index idx
4401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4402 Paragraph ! Environments
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 Paragraph environments|(
4420 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 \begin_layout Standard
4425 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4428 \begin_layout Standard
4447 \begin_inset Newline newline
4450 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4452 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4453 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4454 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4463 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4466 \begin_layout Standard
4467 A paragraph environment is simply a
4468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4475 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4476 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4477 scheme, labels, and so on.
4478 Additionally, you can
4479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4486 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4487 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4488 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4489 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hold-overs from the
4490 days of typewriters.
4491 There are several paragraph environments which are specific to a particular
4493 We'll only be covering the most common ones here.
4496 \begin_layout Standard
4497 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4498 \begin_inset Graphics
4499 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4505 at the left end of the toolbar.
4507 will change the environment of the
4511 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4512 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4513 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4517 \begin_layout Standard
4526 create a new paragraph using the
4530 paragraph environment.
4532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4539 because if you are in one of these environments:
4542 \begin_layout Itemize
4548 \begin_layout Itemize
4554 \begin_layout Itemize
4560 \begin_layout Itemize
4566 \begin_layout Itemize
4572 \begin_layout Itemize
4578 \begin_layout Itemize
4584 \begin_layout Standard
4586 keeps the old paragraph environment when you hit
4590 , rather than resetting it to
4596 will still reset the nesting depth, however.
4597 Usually, starting a new paragraph resets both the paragraph environment
4598 and the nesting depth (for more on nesting see section
4599 \begin_inset space ~
4603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4605 reference "sec:Nesting"
4610 At the moment, all this is context-specific; you're better off expecting
4615 to reset the paragraph environment and depth.
4616 If you want a new paragraph to keep the current environment and depth,
4620 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
4626 \begin_layout Subsection
4630 \begin_layout Standard
4631 The default paragraph environment is
4636 It creates a plain paragraph.
4638 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4639 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4640 this manual) are in the
4647 \begin_layout Standard
4648 You can nest a paragraph using the
4652 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4660 \begin_layout Subsection
4662 \begin_inset Index idx
4665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4674 \begin_layout Standard
4675 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4676 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4685 for thanks or contact information.
4686 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4687 places all of this on a separate page
4688 along with today's date.
4689 For other types of documents, the title
4690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4697 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4701 \begin_layout Standard
4703 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4717 Here's how you use them:
4720 \begin_layout Itemize
4721 Put the title of your document in the
4728 \begin_layout Itemize
4729 Put the author name in the
4736 \begin_layout Itemize
4737 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4738 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4744 Note that using this environment is optional.
4745 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4746 will automatically insert today's date.
4747 If you don't want any date, add the line
4748 \begin_inset Newline newline
4758 \begin_inset Newline newline
4761 to the preamble of your document (menu
4763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4769 \begin_layout Standard
4770 You can use footnotes to insert
4771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4778 or contact information.
4781 \begin_layout Subsection
4783 \begin_inset Index idx
4786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4795 name "subsec:Headings"
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4805 takes care of the numbering for you.
4808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4810 \begin_inset Index idx
4813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4814 Section headings ! Numbered
4822 \begin_layout Standard
4823 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4827 \begin_layout Enumerate
4833 \begin_layout Enumerate
4839 \begin_layout Enumerate
4845 \begin_layout Enumerate
4851 \begin_layout Enumerate
4857 \begin_layout Enumerate
4863 \begin_layout Enumerate
4869 \begin_layout Standard
4871 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4872 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4873 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4876 \begin_layout Standard
4877 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4878 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4879 You group the book into chapters.
4881 does similar grouping:
4884 \begin_layout Itemize
4889 is divided in either
4900 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4924 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4948 \begin_layout Itemize
4960 \begin_layout Standard
4961 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4969 Not all document types use the
4973 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4978 is the top-level heading.
4986 \begin_layout Standard
4991 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
4992 labels it with its number,
4993 along with the number of the subsection, section, and, if applicable, chapter
4995 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5007 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5009 \begin_inset Index idx
5012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5013 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5021 \begin_layout Standard
5022 The unnumbered section headings have a
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5030 at the end of their name.
5031 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5032 the table of contents, see section
5033 \begin_inset space ~
5037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5047 Changing the Numbering
5048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5050 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5057 \begin_layout Standard
5058 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5059 in the Table of Contents.
5060 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5062 Certain classes start with
5076 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5086 This is something you can change.
5089 \begin_layout Standard
5092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5098 \begin_inset Index idx
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5112 \begin_inset space ~
5116 \begin_inset space ~
5121 you'll see two counters.
5126 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5127 numbers a section heading.
5128 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5133 Short Titles of Headings
5134 \begin_inset Index idx
5137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5138 Section headings ! Short titles
5144 \begin_inset Argument 1
5147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5156 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5163 \begin_layout Standard
5164 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5165 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5166 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5167 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5170 \begin_layout Standard
5172 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5173 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5174 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5175 To specify a short title, use the menu
5177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5179 \begin_inset space ~
5185 This will insert a box labeled
5186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
5202 This also works for captions inside floats.
5205 \begin_layout Standard
5206 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5209 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5213 \begin_layout Standard
5214 The following information applies to all section headings:
5217 \begin_layout Itemize
5218 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5221 \begin_layout Itemize
5222 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5225 \begin_layout Itemize
5226 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5229 \begin_layout Itemize
5230 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5233 \begin_layout Subsection
5234 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5237 \begin_layout Standard
5239 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5253 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5254 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5255 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5256 the text they contain.
5257 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5265 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5269 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5278 when you start a new paragraph.
5279 So, you can type in that poem and merrily hit
5283 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5284 Of course, that means that, once you're done typing in that poem, you have
5285 to change back to the
5289 environment yourself.
5292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5309 \begin_inset Index idx
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5321 \begin_layout Standard
5322 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5323 time for the differences.
5332 are identical except for one difference:
5336 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5345 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 Here's an example of the
5362 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5364 See – no indentation!
5368 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5369 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5370 the other paragraph.
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 Here's another example, this time in the
5381 \begin_layout Quotation
5387 If I keep writing, you'll see the indentation.
5388 If your country uses a writing style that shows off new paragraphs by indenting
5389 the first line, then
5393 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5397 you were quoting other text.
5400 \begin_layout Quotation
5401 Here's a new paragraph.
5402 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5403 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5406 \begin_layout Standard
5407 As the examples show,
5411 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5412 They should put quotes in the
5417 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5421 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5430 \begin_inset Index idx
5433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5442 \begin_inset Index idx
5445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5461 \begin_layout Standard
5466 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5472 \begin_inset Newline newline
5475 Which I did not rehearse!
5479 It could be much worse.
5480 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5482 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5483 indented a bit more than the first.
5484 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5490 \begin_inset Newline newline
5493 And make things look fine
5494 \begin_inset Newline newline
5500 arg "newline-insert newline"
5506 \begin_layout Standard
5511 does not indent both margins.
5512 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5513 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5520 arg "newline-insert newline"
5526 \begin_layout Subsection
5528 \begin_inset Index idx
5531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5547 \begin_layout Standard
5549 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5559 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5560 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5569 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5570 lets you provide your own label.
5571 We'll present the individual details of each type of list next after describing
5572 some general features of all four of them.
5575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5579 \begin_layout Standard
5580 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5582 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5583 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5592 reset the environment to
5596 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5597 The nesting depth is hereby kept.
5598 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5602 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5605 to break paragraphs.
5608 \begin_layout Standard
5609 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5610 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5611 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5613 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5614 you read all of section
5615 \begin_inset space ~
5619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5621 reference "sec:Nesting"
5629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5635 \begin_inset Index idx
5638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5654 \begin_layout Standard
5655 The first type of list we'll describe in detail is the
5659 paragraph environment.
5660 It has the following properties:
5663 \begin_layout Itemize
5664 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5665 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5672 \begin_layout Itemize
5674 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5678 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The items can have any length.
5685 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5686 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 environment inside another
5702 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5703 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5710 \begin_layout Itemize
5711 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5716 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5721 \begin_inset space ~
5725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5727 reference "sec:Nesting"
5731 for a full explanation of nesting.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5745 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5750 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5753 \begin_layout Itemize
5754 The label for the first level
5758 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5759 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 The label for the second level is a dash.
5768 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5775 \begin_layout Itemize
5776 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5777 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5784 \begin_layout Itemize
5785 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5789 \begin_layout Itemize
5790 Back out to the third level.
5794 \begin_layout Itemize
5795 Back to the second level.
5799 \begin_layout Itemize
5800 Back to the outermost level.
5803 \begin_layout Standard
5804 These are the default labels for an
5809 You can customize these labels in the
5811 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5814 dialog in the submenu
5821 \begin_inset Index idx
5824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5833 \begin_layout Standard
5834 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5835 We'll explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5837 \begin_inset space ~
5841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5843 reference "sec:Nesting"
5850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5856 \begin_inset Index idx
5859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5868 name "sec:Enumerate"
5875 \begin_layout Standard
5880 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5881 It has these properties:
5884 \begin_layout Enumerate
5885 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5886 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5893 \begin_layout Enumerate
5894 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5898 \begin_layout Enumerate
5900 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5903 \begin_layout Enumerate
5908 environment resets the counter to one.
5911 \begin_layout Enumerate
5921 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5928 \begin_layout Enumerate
5929 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5930 Items can have any length.
5933 \begin_layout Enumerate
5934 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5937 \begin_layout Enumerate
5938 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5941 \begin_layout Enumerate
5942 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5955 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5957 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5958 labels the four different levels in an
5965 \begin_layout Enumerate
5966 The first level of an
5970 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5971 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5978 \begin_layout Enumerate
5979 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5980 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5987 \begin_layout Enumerate
5988 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5989 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5996 \begin_layout Enumerate
5997 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6000 \begin_layout Enumerate
6001 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6006 \begin_layout Enumerate
6007 Back to the third level
6011 \begin_layout Enumerate
6012 Back to the second level.
6016 \begin_layout Enumerate
6017 Back to the outermost level.
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6021 Once again, you can customize the type of numbering used in the
6026 It involves adding commands to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6032 As stated earlier, such customization only shows up in the printed version,
6033 not in \SpecialChar LyX
6037 \begin_layout Standard
6038 There is more to nesting
6042 environments than we've stated here.
6043 You should read section
6044 \begin_inset space ~
6048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6050 reference "sec:Nesting"
6054 to learn more about nesting.
6057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6063 \begin_inset Index idx
6066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6075 \begin_layout Standard
6076 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6080 list has no fixed label.
6081 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6090 of the first line as the label.
6094 \begin_layout Description
6095 Example: This is an example of the
6102 \begin_layout Standard
6104 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6108 \begin_layout Standard
6110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6117 it is meant that the first hit of the
6121 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6123 If you need to use more than one word in the label use a
6131 arg "space-insert protected"
6136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6137 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6139 \begin_inset space ~
6145 \begin_inset space ~
6149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6151 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6155 for more info.) Here is an example:
6158 \begin_layout Description
6160 \begin_inset space ~
6163 Example: This one shows how to use a
6166 \begin_inset space ~
6178 \begin_layout Description
6179 Usage: You should use the
6183 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6184 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6186 It's not a good idea to use a
6190 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6191 You're better off using
6203 paragraphs into them.
6206 \begin_layout Description
6207 Nesting: You can nest
6211 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6215 \begin_layout Standard
6216 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6217 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6218 them from the first line.
6221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6222 The \SpecialChar LyX
6228 \begin_inset Index idx
6231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6232 Lists ! \SpecialChar LyX
6241 \begin_layout Standard
6246 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6247 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6251 \begin_layout Standard
6252 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6260 When you are using a KOMA-Script document class, like in this document,
6265 environment is named
6277 \begin_layout Standard
6286 environment has user-defined labels for each list item.
6287 There are the following properties of this list environment:
6290 \begin_layout Labeling
6291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6293 \begin_inset space ~
6296 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6305 of each line as the item label.
6310 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6311 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6312 blank as described above.
6315 \begin_layout Labeling
6316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6317 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6318 uses different margins for the item label and the
6319 body of the item text.
6320 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6321 label width plus a little extra space.
6325 \begin_layout Labeling
6326 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6328 \begin_inset space ~
6331 width \SpecialChar LyX
6332 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6333 If the label width is larger, the label
6334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6341 into the first line.
6342 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6343 margin of the rest of the item text.
6346 \begin_layout Labeling
6347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6349 \begin_inset space ~
6352 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6357 environment have the same left margin.
6358 \begin_inset Newline newline
6361 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6364 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6366 \begin_inset space ~
6375 \begin_inset space ~
6380 determines the default label width.
6381 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6390 multiple times instead.
6391 The M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6401 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6404 \begin_inset space ~
6409 every time you alter a label in a
6414 \begin_inset Newline newline
6417 The predefined default width is the length of
6418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6427 \begin_inset Newline newline
6431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6439 Setting the cursor into a list item to change only its label width will
6440 only change the width inside \SpecialChar LyX
6441 but not in the output.
6449 \begin_layout Standard
6454 environment the same way like the
6458 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6464 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6468 \begin_layout Standard
6473 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6475 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6477 \begin_inset space ~
6481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6483 reference "sec:Nesting"
6487 to learn about nesting.
6490 \begin_layout Standard
6491 There is yet another feature of the
6495 environment: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6496 left-justifies the item labels
6498 You can use additional
6502 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6503 justifies the item label.
6508 are documented in section
6509 \begin_inset space ~
6513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6515 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6520 Here are some examples:
6521 \begin_inset Newpage pagebreak
6527 \begin_layout Labeling
6528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6529 Left The default for
6536 \begin_layout Labeling
6537 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6538 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6545 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6548 \begin_layout Labeling
6549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6550 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6554 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6561 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6564 \begin_layout Subsection
6566 \begin_inset Index idx
6569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6578 \begin_layout Standard
6579 To use the features described in this section, you must load the module
6582 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6584 in the document settings.
6585 This loads the features of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6591 \begin_inset Index idx
6594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6596 -packages ! enumitem
6604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6605 Custom Enumerate Lists
6606 \begin_inset Index idx
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6610 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6620 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6626 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6627 There you add the command
6630 \begin_layout Standard
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6651 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6652 Code, look at section
6653 \begin_inset space ~
6657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6659 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6672 is hereby the counter of the enumeration in the first level.
6679 outputs the counter as small Roman numeral.
6680 For capital Roman numerals replace in the command above
6693 For Arabic numerals use
6701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6708 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6725 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6733 You can only number 26
6734 \begin_inset space ~
6737 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6745 \begin_layout Standard
6746 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6747 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 As example a list with custom numbering:
6754 \begin_layout Enumerate
6755 \begin_inset Argument 1
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6781 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6788 \begin_layout Enumerate
6789 \begin_inset Argument 1
6792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 \begin_layout Enumerate
6817 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6824 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_inset Argument 1
6828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6849 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6856 \begin_layout Enumerate
6857 \begin_inset Argument 1
6860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6886 \begin_layout Standard
6887 For this list these commands were used:
6890 \begin_layout Standard
6901 \begin_inset Newline newline
6909 \begin_inset Newline newline
6917 \begin_inset Newline newline
6927 \begin_layout Standard
6934 makes the label emphasized and
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6952 When you changed the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6953 lists until you change the definition.
6961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6963 \begin_inset Index idx
6966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6969 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6978 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6981 \begin_layout Enumerate
6982 \begin_inset Argument 1
6985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 \begin_inset Note Note
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7010 goes back to default numbering
7018 \begin_layout Enumerate
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7030 \begin_layout Standard
7031 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7036 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7037 to indicate that it is a resumed
7038 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7039 , but in the output.
7042 \begin_layout Standard
7043 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7051 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7060 \begin_layout Standard
7061 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number than the
7063 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7064 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7065 of a normal new enumeration.
7066 There insert the command
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7080 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7084 \begin_layout Enumerate
7088 \begin_layout Enumerate
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7093 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7096 \begin_layout Enumerate
7097 \begin_inset Argument 1
7100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7116 This enumeration starts at 4
7119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7121 \begin_inset Index idx
7124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7133 \begin_layout Standard
7134 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7136 For example the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7139 \begin_layout Itemize
7143 \begin_layout Itemize
7144 with standard spacing
7147 \begin_layout Standard
7148 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7150 There add the command
7154 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7157 \begin_layout Itemize
7158 \begin_inset Argument 1
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7180 \begin_layout Itemize
7184 \begin_layout Itemize
7188 \begin_layout Standard
7189 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7196 \begin_inset Index idx
7199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 -packages ! enumitem
7207 For more info see its documentation,
7208 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7220 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to the one of the
7221 paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7225 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7228 \begin_layout Enumerate
7229 \begin_inset Argument 1
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7240 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7253 \begin_layout Enumerate
7254 with negative indentation
7257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7258 Further Customization
7259 \begin_inset Index idx
7262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7271 \begin_layout Standard
7272 You can also change the style of description lists.
7276 \begin_layout Standard
7282 \begin_layout Standard
7283 changes the description label font, the command
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7292 \begin_layout Standard
7293 sets the list style.
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7297 An example where the command
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7305 itshape, style=nextline
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_layout Description
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7318 \begin_inset Argument 1
7321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7327 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7329 itshape, style=nextline
7339 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7340 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7344 \begin_layout Description
7346 \begin_inset space ~
7349 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7350 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7351 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7355 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7361 \begin_inset Index idx
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 -packages ! enumitem
7374 For more info see its documentation,
7375 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7384 \begin_layout Subsection
7386 \begin_inset Index idx
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7406 \begin_inset space ~
7414 \begin_layout Standard
7415 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7416 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7430 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7431 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7432 gags on the document.
7433 In contrast, you can use the
7440 \begin_inset space ~
7445 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7446 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7450 \begin_layout Standard
7451 Of course, you're not limited to using
7458 \begin_inset space ~
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7472 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7473 some European academic papers.
7476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7480 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7487 \begin_layout Standard
7492 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7493 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7497 \begin_inset space ~
7502 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7503 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7504 Here's an example of each:
7507 \begin_layout Right Address
7509 \begin_inset Newline newline
7513 \begin_inset Newline newline
7517 \begin_inset Newline newline
7520 When is it? What is today?
7523 \begin_layout Standard
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7533 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7535 the largest block of text on a single line.
7536 Here's an example of the
7543 \begin_layout Address
7545 \begin_inset Newline newline
7548 Where do I send this
7549 \begin_inset Newline newline
7552 Your post office and country
7555 \begin_layout Standard
7556 As you can see, both
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7568 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7573 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7574 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7580 This makes sense, since
7588 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7589 Thus, you have to use
7596 arg "newline-insert newline"
7602 \begin_inset space ~
7605 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
7607 \begin_inset space ~
7616 menu) to start a new line in an
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7631 \begin_layout Subsection
7635 \begin_layout Standard
7636 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7637 or list of references.
7639 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7646 \begin_inset Index idx
7649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7658 \begin_layout Standard
7663 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7664 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7665 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7666 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7670 in anything else or vice versa.
7676 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7677 The book document classes ignores the
7681 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7685 in a letter document class.
7688 \begin_layout Standard
7693 environment does several things for you.
7694 First, it puts the centered label
7695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7703 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7705 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7706 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7707 the subsequent text.
7708 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7710 The appearance in the output depends on the used article or report class.
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7714 Starting a new paragraph by hitting
7718 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7719 The new paragraph will still be in the
7724 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7725 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7729 \begin_inset Float figure
7734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7736 \begin_inset Graphics
7737 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
7744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7745 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7750 name "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 We'd love to give you directly an example of the
7776 environment, but since this document is in the
7777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7784 class, we can't do this.
7785 We inserted it therefore as figure
7786 \begin_inset space ~
7790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7792 reference "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7797 If you've never heard of an
7798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7805 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7814 \begin_inset Index idx
7817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7826 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7838 environment is used to list references.
7839 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7840 only use it at the end of the document.
7845 in anything else or vice versa won't work.
7848 \begin_layout Standard
7849 When you first open a
7853 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7854 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7870 depending on the document class.
7871 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7872 Each paragraph of the
7876 environment is a bibliography entry.
7881 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7882 Each new paragraph is still in the
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7890 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7891 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7893 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7895 handling, have a look at in section
7896 \begin_inset space ~
7900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7902 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7909 \begin_layout Subsection
7914 \begin_inset Index idx
7917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7918 Paragraph ! \SpecialChar LyX
7925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7927 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7934 \begin_layout Standard
7940 environment is another \SpecialChar LyX
7942 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7947 key as a fixed whitespace;
7951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7964 \begin_inset space ~
7969 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7974 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
7976 If you need to insert blank lines, you'll still need to use
7979 arg "newline-insert newline"
7996 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7997 So, when you finish using the
8002 environment, you'll need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8003 Also, you can nest the
8008 environment inside of others.
8011 \begin_layout Standard
8012 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8015 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 arg "newline-insert newline"
8022 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8027 \begin_inset space \space{}
8037 arg "newline-insert newline"
8043 \begin_layout Itemize
8047 arg "newline-insert newline"
8055 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8062 \begin_layout Itemize
8067 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
8074 \begin_layout Itemize
8078 arg "space-insert protected"
8085 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8087 You must put at least one
8091 in any line you want blank.
8092 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8096 \begin_layout Itemize
8097 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8101 since that will insert
8106 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8109 arg "self-insert \""
8115 \begin_layout Standard
8119 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8123 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8127 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8131 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8135 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8136 printf("Hello World!
8141 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8145 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8149 \begin_layout Standard
8150 This is just the standard
8151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8162 \begin_layout Standard
8168 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
8169 rc-files, and so on.
8170 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8171 as if you used a typewriter.
8172 \begin_inset Index idx
8175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8176 Paragraph environments|)
8181 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8184 Program Code Listings
8193 \begin_layout Section
8194 Nesting Environments
8195 \begin_inset Index idx
8198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8199 Nesting ! Environments
8205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8214 \begin_layout Subsection
8218 \begin_layout Standard
8220 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8222 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8224 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8226 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8238 \begin_layout Enumerate
8242 \begin_layout Enumerate
8244 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8251 \begin_layout Enumerate
8255 \begin_layout Enumerate
8260 \begin_layout Enumerate
8264 \begin_layout Standard
8265 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8266 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8269 \begin_inset space ~
8273 \begin_inset space ~
8281 \begin_inset space ~
8285 \begin_inset space ~
8294 menu to change the nesting depth of the current paragraph (the status bar
8295 will tell you how far you are nested).
8296 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8299 arg "depth-increment"
8305 arg "depth-decrement"
8308 or the convenient key bindings
8319 arg "depth-increment"
8325 arg "depth-decrement"
8328 to change the nesting level.
8329 The change will work on the current selection if you have made one (allowing
8330 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8334 \begin_layout Standard
8335 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8336 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8337 If it's invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8338 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8339 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8342 \begin_layout Standard
8343 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8345 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8347 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8350 \begin_layout Subsection
8351 What You Can and Can't Nest
8354 \begin_layout Standard
8355 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8356 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 The question if nesting a paragraph environment is possible, is a bit more
8361 complicated than a simple yes or no.
8362 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8366 Completely unnestable
8369 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8374 \begin_layout Itemize
8375 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8380 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8381 environments have them:
8384 \begin_layout Description
8385 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8386 Can't nest into them.
8387 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 \begin_layout Description
8427 \begin_inset space ~
8430 Nestable You can nest them.
8431 You can nest other things into them.
8432 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8439 \begin_layout Itemize
8445 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_layout Itemize
8457 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8481 \begin_layout Itemize
8489 \begin_layout Description
8490 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8491 You can't nest anything into them.
8492 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8499 \begin_layout Itemize
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Itemize
8517 \begin_layout Itemize
8523 \begin_layout Itemize
8529 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_inset space ~
8587 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_layout Standard
8595 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8603 Although it is possible to nest numbered section headings like
8612 \begin_inset space ~
8616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8620 \begin_inset space \space{}
8623 lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create
8624 well structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested
8625 section headings violate this.
8633 \begin_layout Subsection
8634 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8635 \begin_inset Index idx
8638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8639 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8647 \begin_layout Standard
8648 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8649 affected by nesting anyhow.
8653 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8665 \begin_layout Standard
8667 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8675 Figures and tables in
8679 are not affected by this.
8684 Have a look at section
8685 \begin_inset space ~
8689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8691 reference "sec:Floats"
8695 for more information about
8702 \begin_layout Standard
8704 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8705 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8709 \begin_layout Standard
8710 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8718 of its own, it behaves just like a
8719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8726 paragraph environment.
8727 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8731 \begin_layout Standard
8732 Here's an example with a table:
8735 \begin_layout Enumerate
8737 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8744 \begin_layout Enumerate
8745 This is (a) and it's nested.
8746 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8753 \begin_layout Standard
8754 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8760 \begin_layout Standard
8762 \begin_inset Tabular
8763 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8764 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8765 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8766 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8851 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8858 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8864 \begin_layout Enumerate
8868 \begin_layout Standard
8869 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8872 \begin_layout Enumerate
8874 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8881 \begin_layout Enumerate
8882 This is (a) and it's nested.
8886 \begin_layout Standard
8887 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8893 \begin_layout Standard
8895 \begin_inset Tabular
8896 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8897 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8898 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8899 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8983 \begin_layout Standard
8984 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8990 \begin_layout Enumerate
8997 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9000 \begin_layout Enumerate
9004 \begin_layout Standard
9005 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9009 \begin_layout Standard
9010 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9013 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9018 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9025 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 This is (a) and it's nested.
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9038 \begin_inset Tabular
9039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9040 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 \begin_layout Standard
9127 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9133 \begin_layout Enumerate
9135 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9143 \begin_layout Enumerate
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9154 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9155 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9159 \begin_layout Subsection
9160 Usage and General Features
9163 \begin_layout Standard
9164 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9165 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9174 is the innermost possible depth.
9175 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 level #1 – outermost
9180 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9196 \begin_layout Enumerate
9198 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9205 \begin_layout Enumerate
9207 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9214 \begin_layout Itemize
9216 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9223 \begin_layout Itemize
9232 \begin_layout Standard
9233 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9234 both of them in the example.
9235 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9245 For example, if we tried to nest another
9250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9257 , we would get errors.
9260 \begin_layout Subsection
9262 \begin_inset Index idx
9265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9274 \begin_layout Standard
9275 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9276 We have several examples of nested environments.
9277 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9282 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9285 \begin_layout Labeling
9286 \labelwidthstring MMM
9287 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9293 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9300 \begin_layout Labeling
9301 \labelwidthstring MMM
9302 #2-a This is level #2.
9303 We created it by using
9306 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9312 arg "depth-increment"
9316 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9323 \begin_layout Labeling
9324 \labelwidthstring MMM
9325 #3-a This is level #3.
9326 This time, we just hit
9333 arg "depth-increment"
9337 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9341 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9347 arg "depth-increment"
9351 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9358 \begin_layout Standard
9363 environment, nested inside of
9364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9372 So, it's at level #4.
9373 We did this by hitting
9376 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9382 arg "depth-increment"
9385 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9390 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9406 \begin_layout Standard
9411 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9414 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9420 \begin_layout Labeling
9421 \labelwidthstring MMM
9422 #4-a This is level #4.
9426 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9429 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9434 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9438 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9443 keep nesting things inside
9444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9452 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9463 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9470 \begin_layout Labeling
9471 \labelwidthstring MMM
9472 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9473 and this is level #6.
9474 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9478 \begin_layout Labeling
9479 \labelwidthstring MMM
9480 #5-b Back to level #5.
9484 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9490 arg "depth-decrement"
9497 \begin_layout Labeling
9498 \labelwidthstring MMM
9502 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9508 arg "depth-decrement"
9511 , we're back at level #4.
9515 \begin_layout Labeling
9516 \labelwidthstring MMM
9517 #3-b Back to level #3.
9518 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9522 \begin_layout Labeling
9523 \labelwidthstring MMM
9524 #2-b Back to level #2.
9529 \begin_layout Labeling
9530 \labelwidthstring MMM
9531 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9532 After this sentence, we'll hit
9536 and change the paragraph environment back to
9543 \begin_layout Standard
9544 We could have also used the
9560 environment in place of the
9565 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9569 Example 2: Inheritance
9572 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9573 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9574 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9577 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9586 arg "depth-increment"
9589 , after which, we'll change to the
9594 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9601 \begin_layout Enumerate
9606 environment, at level #2.
9609 \begin_layout Enumerate
9610 Notice how the nested
9614 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9619 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9623 \begin_layout Standard
9624 We ended this example by hitting
9629 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9633 and reset the nesting depth by using
9636 arg "depth-decrement"
9642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9643 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9652 \begin_inset Argument 1
9655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9656 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9664 \begin_layout Enumerate
9665 This is level #1, in an
9669 paragraph environment.
9670 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9671 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9678 \begin_layout Enumerate
9683 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9689 arg "depth-increment"
9693 Now, what happens if we nest an
9697 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9698 label be? An asterisk?
9699 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9706 \begin_layout Itemize
9716 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9717 So, its label is a bullet.
9718 (We got here by using
9721 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9727 arg "depth-increment"
9730 , then changing the environment to
9735 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9742 \begin_layout Itemize
9743 Here's level #4, produced using
9746 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9752 arg "depth-increment"
9756 We'll do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9758 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9765 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9773 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9777 , because we are in the
9786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9805 \begin_layout Enumerate
9810 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9811 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9815 \begin_layout Enumerate
9816 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9819 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9822 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9825 \begin_layout Enumerate
9829 arg "depth-decrement"
9832 to decrease the depth after the next
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 \begin_layout Enumerate
9844 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9849 \begin_layout Enumerate
9851 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9852 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9856 \begin_layout Enumerate
9857 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9866 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9871 reset the counter for the label.
9875 \begin_layout Enumerate
9879 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9885 arg "depth-decrement"
9888 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9889 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9890 into the twofold-nested
9898 \begin_layout Enumerate
9899 The same thing happens if we do another
9902 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9908 arg "depth-decrement"
9911 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9914 \begin_layout Standard
9915 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9920 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9935 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9942 The same rule applies for the
9946 environment, as well.
9949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9950 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9955 We won't nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into the
9956 same detail with how we did it.
9962 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9969 \begin_layout Standard
9977 arg "depth-increment"
9984 : level #2) We'll stick an encapsulated description of how we created the
9985 example in parentheses someplace.
9986 For example, the two keybindings are how we changed the depth.
9987 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9988 Either before or after this, we'll put in the level.
9992 \begin_layout Enumerate
9997 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9998 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10005 \begin_layout Verse
10006 Now we'll add verse.
10007 \begin_inset Newline newline
10010 It will get much worse.
10011 \begin_inset Newline newline
10021 arg "depth-increment"
10031 \begin_layout Verse
10032 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10033 \begin_inset Newline newline
10036 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10037 \begin_inset Newline newline
10043 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10051 \begin_layout Verse
10052 Here comes a table:
10053 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10060 \begin_layout Standard
10061 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10067 \begin_layout Standard
10069 \begin_inset Tabular
10070 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10071 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10158 \begin_layout Verse
10162 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10172 arg "depth-increment"
10178 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10188 arg "depth-decrement"
10195 \begin_layout Enumerate
10200 : level #1) This is another item.
10201 Note that selecting a
10205 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10206 3 times to put the table inside the
10214 \begin_layout Quotation
10215 We're now ending the
10219 list and changing to
10224 We're still at level #1.
10225 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10226 The next set of paragraphs is a
10227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10234 We'll nest both the
10241 \begin_inset space ~
10246 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10250 for the letter body.
10254 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 to preserve the depth.
10258 Remember that you need to use
10261 arg "newline-insert newline"
10264 to create multiple lines inside the
10271 \begin_inset space ~
10278 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10285 \begin_layout Right Address
10287 \begin_inset Newline newline
10290 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10291 \begin_inset Newline newline
10297 \begin_layout Address
10299 \begin_inset space ~
10305 \begin_layout Quotation
10306 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10310 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10311 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10312 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10313 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10314 as soon as possible.
10315 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10318 \begin_layout Quotation
10319 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10320 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10321 with your order, along with payment.
10324 \begin_layout Quotation
10325 We thank you again for your patience.
10328 \begin_layout Address
10330 \begin_inset Newline newline
10337 \begin_layout Quotation
10338 That ends that example!
10341 \begin_layout Standard
10342 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10343 gives you a lot of power with just
10345 We could have easily nested an
10366 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10369 \begin_layout Section
10370 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10371 \begin_inset Index idx
10374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10383 \begin_layout Standard
10384 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10385 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10387 more spaces: Spaces of different width and spaces which can or cannot be
10388 broken at the end of a line.
10389 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10393 \begin_layout Subsection
10395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10397 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10402 \begin_inset Index idx
10405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10414 \begin_layout Standard
10415 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10416 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10417 ) not to break the line at
10419 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky linebreaks, like in:
10422 \begin_layout Quote
10423 Further documentation is given in section
10424 \begin_inset Newline newline
10428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10430 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10438 \begin_layout Standard
10439 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10454 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10463 A protected space is set with
10465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10466 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10470 \begin_inset space ~
10480 arg "space-insert protected"
10486 \begin_layout Subsection
10488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10490 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10495 \begin_inset Index idx
10498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10499 Spacing ! Horizontal
10507 \begin_layout Standard
10508 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10511 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10515 The length units are listed in Appendix
10516 \begin_inset space ~
10520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10522 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
10529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10533 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10538 \begin_inset Index idx
10541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10542 Spaces ! Inter-word
10550 \begin_layout Standard
10552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10556 \begin_inset space \space{}
10559 English) have the typographical convention to add extra space after an end-of-se
10560 ntence punctuation mark, and \SpecialChar LyX
10561 honors those conventions (see section
10562 \begin_inset space ~
10566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10568 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10573 Sometimes, you want a normal space nevertheless.
10574 In this case, insert an inter-word space (shortcut
10577 arg "space-insert normal"
10583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10587 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10592 \begin_inset Index idx
10595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10604 \begin_layout Standard
10606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10613 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10622 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10623 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance
10624 inside abbreviations:
10627 \begin_layout Quote
10629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10633 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10636 \begin_layout Standard
10637 or between values and units.
10638 Compare for example this:
10639 \begin_inset Newline newline
10643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10647 \begin_inset Newline newline
10650 10 kg (normal space
10653 \begin_layout Standard
10654 You can insert thin spaces also with the menu
10656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10657 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10659 \begin_inset space ~
10667 arg "space-insert thin"
10673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10677 name "subsec:More-Spaces"
10684 \begin_layout Standard
10685 You can furthermore insert the following space types:
10688 \begin_layout Description
10690 \begin_inset space ~
10694 \begin_inset space ~
10697 space A line with a
10698 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10702 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10706 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10709 Negative thin space between the arrows.
10712 \begin_layout Description
10714 \begin_inset space ~
10718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10722 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10726 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10730 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10737 em) space between the arrows.
10740 \begin_layout Description
10742 \begin_inset space ~
10746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10750 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10754 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10758 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10762 \begin_inset space ~
10766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10769 em) space between the arrows.
10772 \begin_layout Description
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10782 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10786 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10790 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10794 \begin_inset space ~
10798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10801 em) space between the arrows.
10804 \begin_layout Description
10806 \begin_inset space ~
10810 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10814 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10819 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10826 cm space between the arrows.
10829 \begin_layout Standard
10831 \begin_inset space ~
10835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10837 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10841 lists the different space sizes.
10844 \begin_layout Standard
10845 \begin_inset Float table
10850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10852 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10857 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10861 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10871 \begin_inset Tabular
10872 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10873 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10874 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10875 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11098 \begin_inset Index idx
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 \begin_layout Standard
11111 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11112 feature for adding extra space
11113 in a uniform fashion.
11114 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11115 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11116 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11117 equally between themselves.
11121 \begin_layout Standard
11122 Here a few examples what you can do with them:
11125 \begin_layout Quote
11127 This is on the left side
11128 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11131 This is on the right
11134 \begin_layout Quote
11137 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11141 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11147 \begin_layout Quote
11150 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11154 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11158 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11164 \begin_layout Standard
11165 That was an example in the
11171 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11175 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11179 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11182 is one in a standard paragraph.
11183 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11187 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11190 \begin_layout Standard
11191 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11194 \begin_inset space ~
11199 in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11202 \begin_layout Standard
11204 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11208 \begin_inset space ~
11214 \begin_layout Standard
11216 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11220 \begin_inset space ~
11226 \begin_layout Standard
11228 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11232 \begin_inset space ~
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11240 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11244 \begin_inset space ~
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11252 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11256 \begin_inset space ~
11262 \begin_layout Standard
11264 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11268 \begin_inset space ~
11274 \begin_layout Standard
11275 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11287 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11289 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11290 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11294 option in the space dialog.
11302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11306 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11311 \begin_inset Index idx
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11323 \begin_layout Standard
11324 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11330 \begin_inset space \space{}
11333 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11336 \begin_layout Standard
11337 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11340 What is correct English?:
11341 \begin_inset Newline newline
11345 \begin_inset Newline newline
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11352 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11353 \begin_inset Newline newline
11357 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11368 \begin_inset Newline newline
11372 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11383 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11389 \begin_layout Standard
11390 So that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11395 \begin_inset space ~
11399 \begin_inset space ~
11403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11407 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11410 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11414 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11420 \begin_inset space ~
11424 \begin_inset space ~
11428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11431 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11440 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11441 That is why it is named
11442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11450 The normal phantom ouputs the width and heigth of the content as space,
11451 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11455 \begin_layout Subsection
11457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11459 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11464 \begin_inset Index idx
11467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11476 \begin_layout Standard
11477 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11480 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11482 \begin_inset space ~
11488 There you find the following sizes:
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11504 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11505 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11510 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11516 \begin_inset Index idx
11519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11520 Document ! Settings
11525 for the paragraph separation.
11526 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11543 \begin_inset Index idx
11546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11552 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11553 An example: You have only two short paragraphs on one page with a vfill
11555 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11556 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11565 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11574 s are described in section
11575 \begin_inset space ~
11579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11581 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11590 If there are several
11594 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11595 You can therefore use
11599 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11607 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11608 \begin_inset space ~
11612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11614 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
11621 \begin_layout Standard
11622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 When the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11633 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11645 \begin_layout Subsection
11646 Paragraph Alignment
11649 \begin_layout Standard
11650 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11652 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11656 There are five possibilities:
11659 \begin_layout Itemize
11667 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11673 \begin_layout Itemize
11681 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11687 \begin_layout Itemize
11695 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11701 \begin_layout Itemize
11709 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11715 \begin_layout Itemize
11723 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11729 \begin_layout Standard
11730 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11731 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11732 the left and right margins.
11733 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11734 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11740 \begin_layout Standard
11742 This paragraph is right aligned,
11745 \begin_layout Standard
11747 this one is centered,
11750 \begin_layout Standard
11752 this one is left aligned.
11755 \begin_layout Subsection
11757 \begin_inset Index idx
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11761 Page breaks ! Forced
11767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11769 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11776 \begin_layout Standard
11777 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11778 does the pagebreaks in your document, you can
11779 force a page break where you want one.
11780 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11781 is good at page breaking.
11782 Only if you use a lot of
11786 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11787 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11791 We recommend not to use forced pagebreaks until the text is finished and
11792 until you have checked in the preview to see if you
11796 have to change the page breaking.
11799 \begin_layout Standard
11800 There are two types of pagebreaks: One that ends the page without any special
11802 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11813 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11816 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11818 \begin_inset space ~
11823 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11825 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11826 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11829 \begin_layout Standard
11830 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11831 at the top of a page.
11832 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11834 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11835 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11836 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11840 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11844 to learn more about
11851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11855 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11860 \begin_inset Index idx
11863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11864 Page breaks ! Clear
11872 \begin_layout Standard
11873 Rather than forced pagebreaks where the content behind the break is placed
11874 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11875 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11876 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed behind
11877 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11880 \begin_layout Standard
11881 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11884 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11886 \begin_inset space ~
11892 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11895 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11897 \begin_inset space ~
11901 \begin_inset space ~
11906 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11907 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11910 \begin_layout Subsection
11912 \begin_inset Index idx
11915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11924 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11932 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: One that simply
11934 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11937 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 \begin_inset space ~
11943 \begin_inset space ~
11951 arg "newline-insert newline"
11955 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11958 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11960 \begin_inset space ~
11964 \begin_inset space ~
11969 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11971 This is necessary to avoid
11972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11979 in justified paragraphs due to whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11983 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
11984 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
11986 very good at line breaking.
11987 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to actively
11988 set a line break, e.
11989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11993 \begin_inset space \space{}
11996 in a poem or for an address (see sections
11997 \begin_inset space ~
12001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12003 reference "sec:Quote"
12008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12010 reference "sec:Verse"
12015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12017 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12024 \begin_layout Subsection
12026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12028 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12033 \begin_inset Index idx
12036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12047 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12062 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12064 \begin_inset space ~
12069 you can insert horizontal lines.
12070 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12071 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12072 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12075 \begin_layout Standard
12077 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12088 \begin_layout Standard
12092 \begin_layout Section
12093 Characters and Symbols
12096 \begin_layout Standard
12097 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12098 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter e.
12099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12103 \begin_inset space \space{}
12106 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12114 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12118 for information on how this is done.
12121 \begin_layout Standard
12122 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12127 dialog via the menu
12129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12136 \begin_layout Standard
12137 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12145 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12146 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12148 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12156 \begin_layout Section
12157 Fonts and Text Styles
12158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12160 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12167 \begin_layout Subsection
12169 \begin_inset Index idx
12172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12182 There are two types of fonts:
12185 \begin_layout Description
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12191 \begin_inset Index idx
12194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12200 are fonts, built from outlines of the single glyphs (i.
12201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12205 characters) in the font.
12206 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12207 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12208 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12209 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12210 This means that outline fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12211 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12212 to provide a good image, it might be hard to provide a good rendering.
12213 \begin_inset Newline newline
12216 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12217 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12218 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12219 sizes than at small ones.
12220 \begin_inset Newline newline
12234 \begin_inset space ~
12242 \begin_layout Description
12244 \begin_inset space ~
12248 \begin_inset Index idx
12251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12257 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start, so they
12258 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12259 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12260 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12261 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in a
12262 picture manipulation program.
12263 In order to relieve this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12264 several fixed sizes typically from around 8 pixels high up to 34 pixels
12265 or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12266 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12267 to display each glyph, so bitmap fonts are thus faster displayed than scalable
12269 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12270 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12271 \begin_inset Newline newline
12274 Bitmap fonts are named
12277 \begin_inset space ~
12282 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12285 \begin_layout Standard
12286 The result of all this, is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they
12287 are designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12288 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12289 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12290 use scalable fonts.
12293 \begin_layout Standard
12294 To test which fonts are used in a PDF-document, you can have a look into
12295 its document properties.
12298 \begin_layout Standard
12299 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12300 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12301 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12302 font to emphasize text, you use an
12303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12311 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12313 In \SpecialChar LyX
12314 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12318 \begin_layout Subsection
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12323 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12330 \begin_layout Standard
12331 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12332 uses its own fonts.
12333 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12334 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12337 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12338 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12339 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12340 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited, compared
12341 to usual word processors.
12342 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12343 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12344 files are very portable across
12345 different machines.
12346 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12347 was increased a lot
12348 meanwhile so that you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
12349 In \SpecialChar LyX
12350 , only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12352 \begin_inset space ~
12356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12358 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12363 However, all others are available if you enter the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
12365 the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12370 Furthermore, recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12371 engines that are also
12372 able to directly access fonts that are installed for your operating system
12373 (OS), namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12374 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12376 Both engines are now supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12378 By using them, you can use theoretically any OpenType or TrueType font
12379 that is installed on your system.
12380 The next section describes how to use these OS fonts.
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12392 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12393 es; so you might have to experiment.
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12411 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12412 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12413 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12414 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12423 \begin_layout Subsection
12424 Document Font and Font size
12425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12427 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12432 \begin_inset Index idx
12435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12442 \begin_inset Index idx
12445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12454 \begin_layout Standard
12455 You can set the document fonts in the
12457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12461 \begin_inset Index idx
12464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 Document ! Settings
12471 There you can specify which font should be used for the three different
12472 font shapes roman (serif),
12475 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_layout Standard
12488 The possible options for the font include
12492 and a list of fonts available on your system.
12497 uses the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12505 \begin_inset space ~
12511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12524 European Computer Modern
12527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12537 \begin_layout Standard
12546 are bitmap fonts, they often looks pixelated in PDF output, especially
12547 when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12552 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12555 \begin_inset space ~
12560 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12566 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12567 There are three ways to use one:
12570 \begin_layout Itemize
12574 \begin_inset space ~
12579 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12592 \begin_inset space ~
12597 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12598 community in order to replace
12602 as the default font.
12603 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12604 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12607 \begin_inset space ~
12620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12621 One difference is improved kerning.
12629 \begin_layout Itemize
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset space ~
12642 fonts in (the rare) case that
12645 \begin_inset space ~
12650 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12665 Virtual means that it
12666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12677 -glyphs from other fonts.
12678 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12706 \begin_inset Index idx
12709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12713 -packages ! aeguill
12718 with the document preamble line
12719 \begin_inset Newline newline
12726 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12727 \begin_inset Newline newline
12732 will fix the guillemet problem.
12737 and that accented characters are not
12741 glyph, but build of
12745 characters, the accent and the letter.
12746 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12752 If you search for example for the French word
12753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12760 in a PDF, you won't get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches for
12762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12769 and not for the glyph
12770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12784 \begin_layout Itemize
12785 If you do not like the look of
12793 , you can of course select one of the other provided vector fonts, e.
12794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12798 \begin_inset space ~
12804 \begin_inset space ~
12816 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12817 \begin_inset space ~
12820 serif and typewriter fonts
12824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12825 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12832 \begin_inset space ~
12841 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12846 \begin_inset space \space{}
12854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12858 \begin_inset space \space{}
12864 \begin_inset space ~
12872 \begin_inset space ~
12882 , but you can also select your own.
12883 \begin_inset Newline newline
12886 The differences between roman,
12889 \begin_inset space ~
12898 fonts are explained in section
12899 \begin_inset space ~
12903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12905 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12910 \begin_inset Newline newline
12916 \begin_inset space ~
12921 was originally designed for newspapers.
12922 That means its glyphs are smaller than the ones from other fonts to fit
12923 into the small newspaper columns.
12927 \begin_inset space ~
12932 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12935 \begin_layout Standard
12936 For the font size there are four possible values:
12953 depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12954 -system, normally it is equal to the font size 10.
12957 \begin_layout Standard
12958 The font sizes are the
12963 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
12964 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
12965 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12966 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12975 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12976 \begin_inset space ~
12980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12982 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12989 \begin_layout Standard
12994 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12995 a font to display the script characters.
12999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13000 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13006 So this has no effect for the document language
13022 \begin_layout Standard
13023 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13027 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13035 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13040 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13041 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13043 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13045 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13048 dialog, see section
13049 \begin_inset space ~
13053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13055 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13067 \begin_layout Subsection
13068 Using Different Character Styles
13069 \begin_inset Index idx
13072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13079 \begin_inset Index idx
13082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13091 \begin_layout Standard
13092 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13093 automatically changes the character style for certain
13094 paragraph environments.
13096 supports two character styles,
13105 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13109 \begin_layout Standard
13114 style, do one of the following:
13117 \begin_layout Itemize
13118 click on the toolbar button
13127 \begin_layout Itemize
13128 use the key binding
13137 \begin_layout Standard
13138 These commands are all toggles.
13143 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13146 \begin_layout Standard
13147 One typically uses the
13151 style for proper names.
13153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13160 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13168 \begin_layout Standard
13169 A more widely used character style is the
13174 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13181 \begin_layout Itemize
13182 clicking on the toolbar button
13191 \begin_layout Itemize
13192 using the keybindings
13201 \begin_layout Standard
13206 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13208 use a different font.
13211 \begin_layout Standard
13212 We've been using the
13216 style all over the place in this document.
13217 Here's one more example:
13220 \begin_layout Quotation
13223 Don't overuse character styles!
13226 \begin_layout Standard
13227 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13228 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13229 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13230 the common tendency to overuse character style.
13234 \begin_layout Standard
13235 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13245 \begin_inset space ~
13253 \begin_layout Subsection
13254 Fine-Tuning with the Text Style dialog
13255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13257 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13262 \begin_inset Index idx
13265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13274 \begin_layout Standard
13275 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning, so
13277 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13278 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13279 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13280 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13281 from ordinary dialog.
13284 \begin_layout Standard
13285 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13286 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13287 \begin_inset Newline newline
13290 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not well readable and
13291 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13294 \begin_layout Standard
13295 To use custom character styles, open the
13297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13299 \begin_inset space ~
13304 dialog or press the toolbar button
13307 arg "dialog-show character"
13311 There are several boxes on this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13312 font property which you can choose.
13313 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13321 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13326 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13327 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13328 environments in a snap.
13331 \begin_layout Standard
13332 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13335 \begin_inset space ~
13347 \begin_layout Labeling
13348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13362 The possible options are:
13363 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13370 \begin_layout Labeling
13371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13376 This is the Roman font family.
13377 Normally a serif font.
13378 It's also the default family.
13388 \begin_layout Labeling
13389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13393 \begin_inset space ~
13400 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13412 \begin_layout Labeling
13413 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13420 This is the Typewriter font family.
13426 arg "font-typewriter"
13435 \begin_layout Labeling
13436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13441 This corresponds to the print weight.
13443 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13450 \begin_layout Labeling
13451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13456 This is the Medium font series.
13457 It's also the default series.
13460 \begin_layout Labeling
13461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13468 This is the Bold font series.
13481 \begin_layout Labeling
13482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13487 As the name implies.
13489 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13496 \begin_layout Labeling
13497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13502 This is the Upright font shape.
13503 It's also the default shape.
13506 \begin_layout Labeling
13507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13521 s the Italic font shape
13527 \begin_layout Labeling
13528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13535 This is the Slanted font shape
13537 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13538 , this is different from italic).
13541 \begin_layout Labeling
13542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13546 \begin_inset space ~
13553 This is the Small caps font shape
13560 \begin_layout Labeling
13561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13566 Alters the size of the font.
13567 You'll find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportio
13568 nal to the document font size.
13569 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
13570 the details, but a general description of what
13573 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13580 \begin_layout Labeling
13581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13602 arg "font-size tiny"
13608 \begin_layout Labeling
13609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13630 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13636 \begin_layout Labeling
13637 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13658 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13664 \begin_layout Labeling
13665 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13686 arg "font-size small"
13692 \begin_layout Labeling
13693 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13707 It's also the default size.
13711 arg "font-size normal"
13717 \begin_layout Labeling
13718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13739 arg "font-size large"
13745 \begin_layout Labeling
13746 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13767 arg "font-size larger"
13773 \begin_layout Labeling
13774 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13795 arg "font-size largest"
13801 \begin_layout Labeling
13802 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13823 arg "font-size huge"
13829 \begin_layout Labeling
13830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13851 arg "font-size giant"
13858 \begin_layout Standard
13863 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13864 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13866 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13867 — use that instead.
13868 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13871 \begin_layout Labeling
13872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13877 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13879 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13886 \begin_layout Labeling
13887 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13894 This is text with emphasize on
13897 This might seem like the same as
13901 , but it is actually a bit different.
13907 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13909 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13912 \begin_layout Labeling
13913 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13920 This is text with Underbar on.
13926 arg "font-underline"
13932 \begin_inset Newline newline
13937 Avoid using underbar if you can! It's a hangover from the typewriter days,
13938 when you couldn't change fonts.
13939 We no longer need to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13940 It is only included in \SpecialChar LyX
13941 because some people
13945 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13948 \begin_layout Labeling
13949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset space ~
13958 This is text with Double underbar on.
13962 arg "font-underunderline"
13966 \begin_inset Newline newline
13969 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13970 about double underbar.
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13983 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13987 arg "font-underwave"
13991 \begin_inset Newline newline
13994 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13995 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13998 \begin_layout Labeling
13999 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14006 This is text with Strikeout on.
14012 arg "font-strikeout"
14016 \begin_inset Newline newline
14019 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has since
14023 \begin_layout Labeling
14024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14031 This is text with Noun on.
14038 , this is a logical attribute.
14039 Normally it's equivalent to
14042 \begin_inset space ~
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 You can adjust the color of the text with this control.
14058 Notice that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14062 \begin_inset space ~
14067 , which is the default
14068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14075 and means normally black, you can choose between
14108 \begin_inset Index idx
14111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14120 \begin_layout Labeling
14121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14126 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14127 the language of the document.
14128 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14129 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14131 \begin_inset Newline newline
14134 If you have for example a longer German Text in your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14136 the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14137 When using the spell checking (see section
14138 \begin_inset space ~
14142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14144 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14148 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary
14151 \begin_layout Standard
14152 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14153 Once you've chosen a new character style via the
14155 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14157 \begin_inset space ~
14162 dialog, the settings are saved.
14163 You can activate them using the toolbar button
14166 arg "textstyle-apply"
14170 The button lets you toggle the state of your custom character style even
14171 when the dialog isn't visible.
14175 \begin_layout Standard
14176 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14183 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14184 (suppose you just set the shape to
14185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14203 \begin_inset space ~
14215 \begin_layout Standard
14216 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14236 \begin_layout Itemize
14242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14249 font, that means every character has the same width, the
14250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14267 \begin_inset Newline newline
14271 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14285 \begin_inset Note Note
14288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14289 For more on phantoms see section
14290 \begin_inset space ~
14294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14296 reference "subsec:More-Spaces"
14306 \begin_inset Newline newline
14312 \begin_layout Itemize
14317 fonts use characters with serifs.
14318 These are the small
14319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14326 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14327 The following example will show the difference:
14328 \begin_inset Newline newline
14332 \begin_inset Newline newline
14337 text without serifs
14340 \begin_inset Newline newline
14343 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14344 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14351 \begin_layout Itemize
14357 This font type is therefore often used for headings and short texts.
14358 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14361 \begin_layout Standard
14362 We conclude with the same warning once again: Don't overuse the fonts.
14363 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14366 \begin_layout Section
14367 Printing and Previewing
14370 \begin_layout Subsection
14374 \begin_layout Standard
14375 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14376 using \SpecialChar LyX
14377 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14378 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14379 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14380 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14382 Additional Features
14387 \begin_layout Standard
14389 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
14392 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
14393 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
14394 we'll only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
14397 is what you use to do your actual writing.
14398 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
14399 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
14400 to turn your writing into printable output.
14401 This happens in two stages:
14404 \begin_layout Enumerate
14405 First, \SpecialChar LyX
14406 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
14408 a file with the extension,
14409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14423 \begin_layout Enumerate
14424 Next, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14425 uses the commands in the
14429 file to produce printable output.
14433 \begin_layout Subsection
14434 Output file formats
14435 \begin_inset Index idx
14438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14447 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
14454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14456 \begin_inset Index idx
14459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14460 File formats ! ASCII
14468 \begin_layout Standard
14469 This file type has the extension
14470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14493 \begin_layout Standard
14494 You can export your document to ASCII by the menu
14496 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14497 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14503 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14506 \begin_inset Index idx
14509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14510 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
14519 \begin_layout Standard
14520 This file type has the extension
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14532 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14535 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
14536 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
14537 -Errors or to process it manually
14538 with console commands.
14539 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
14540 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
14541 's temporary directory whenever you
14542 view or export your document.
14545 \begin_layout Standard
14546 You can export your document as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14547 -file using the menu
14549 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14550 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14567 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14569 \begin_inset Index idx
14572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14581 \begin_layout Standard
14582 This file type has the extension
14583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14603 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14604 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14605 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14609 \begin_layout Standard
14610 DVI files do not contain images, they only link them.
14611 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14612 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the image in the background to make
14613 it visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer when
14615 So we recommend to use PDF for files with many images.
14618 \begin_layout Standard
14619 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14621 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14622 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14630 \begin_inset Index idx
14633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14634 File formats ! PostScript
14642 \begin_layout Standard
14643 This file type has the extension
14644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14656 PostScript was developed by the company
14660 as a printer language.
14661 The file contains therefore commands that the printer uses to print the
14663 PostScript can be seen as a
14664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14667 programming language
14668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14671 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14676 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14683 \begin_inset Index idx
14686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14688 -packages ! pstricks
14698 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14701 \begin_layout Standard
14702 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14706 Encapsulated PostScript
14707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14710 (EPS, file extension
14711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14723 As \SpecialChar LyX
14724 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
14725 convert them in the background to EPS.
14727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14730 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
14732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14735 conversions whenever you view or export your document.
14736 This will slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
14738 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14739 EPS to avoid this problem.
14742 \begin_layout Standard
14743 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14746 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14754 \begin_inset Index idx
14757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14764 \begin_inset Index idx
14767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14776 \begin_layout Standard
14777 This file type has the extension
14778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14794 Portable Document Format
14795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14802 was derived from PostScript.
14803 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14812 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14813 looks exactly the same.
14816 \begin_layout Standard
14817 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14821 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14825 (JPG, file extension
14826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14853 Portable Network Graphics
14854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14857 (PNG, file extension
14858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14870 You can although use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
14872 the background to one of these formats.
14873 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14874 will slow down your workflow.
14875 So we recommend to use images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14878 \begin_layout Standard
14879 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14881 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14884 in three different ways:
14887 \begin_layout Description
14888 PDF This uses the program
14892 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14893 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14897 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14898 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14901 \begin_layout Description
14903 \begin_inset space ~
14906 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14910 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14914 \begin_layout Description
14916 \begin_inset space ~
14919 (pdflatex) This uses the program pdftex that converts your file directly
14923 \begin_layout Description
14925 \begin_inset space ~
14932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14939 X) This uses the program Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14940 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14942 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for
14943 direct font access (see section
14944 \begin_inset space ~
14948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14950 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14955 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts.
14958 \begin_layout Description
14960 \begin_inset space ~
14967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14974 X) This uses the program Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14975 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14976 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14977 is an even newer engine, derived from pdflatex, that also provides
14978 direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
14979 \begin_inset space ~
14983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14985 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14990 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14991 is still work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
14996 \begin_layout Standard
14997 We recommend to use
15000 \begin_inset space ~
15009 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15010 works without problems.
15015 is no longer under development and therefore a bit outdated.
15018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15020 \begin_inset Index idx
15023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15024 FileFormats ! XHTML
15030 \begin_inset Index idx
15033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15042 \begin_layout Standard
15043 This file type has the extension
15044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15056 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15057 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links them, and
15058 when \SpecialChar LyX
15059 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15060 suitable for the purpose.
15061 Math is output as MathML, which renders nicely in browsers that support
15062 it, but not all do.
15065 \begin_layout Standard
15066 XHTML output remains
15067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15074 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15075 features are supported yet.
15077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15081 and the World Wide Web
15082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15087 Additional Features
15089 manual, for more information.
15092 \begin_layout Standard
15093 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15095 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15096 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15103 \begin_layout Subsection
15105 \begin_inset Index idx
15108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15117 \begin_layout Standard
15120 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15121 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15130 or use the toolbar button
15137 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15138 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15145 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15149 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15157 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15162 Further output formats can be selected via
15164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15165 View (Other Formats)
15167 or the toolbar button
15168 \begin_inset Graphics
15169 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
15171 groupId toolbarbuttons
15178 \begin_layout Standard
15181 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15182 viewer window using the menu
15184 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15190 Update (Other Formats)
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15198 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15201 To have a real output, export your document.
15204 \begin_layout Section
15205 A few Words about Typography
15206 \begin_inset Index idx
15209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15218 \begin_layout Subsection
15220 \begin_inset Index idx
15223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15232 \begin_layout Standard
15233 In \SpecialChar LyX
15235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15246 character comes in four lengths: the
15258 , and the minus sign:
15259 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15265 \begin_layout Standard
15266 \begin_inset Tabular
15267 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15268 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
15269 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15270 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15271 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15272 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15301 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15341 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15368 \begin_inset space ~
15371 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15378 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15405 \begin_inset space ~
15408 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15429 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15469 \begin_layout Standard
15470 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15482 character multiple times in a row.
15483 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15484 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15517 \begin_layout Standard
15518 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15519 math mode and has a length of its own.
15520 Here are some examples of the
15521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15535 \begin_layout Enumerate
15536 line- and page-breaks
15537 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15547 \begin_layout Enumerate
15549 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15559 \begin_layout Enumerate
15560 Oh — there's a dash.
15561 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15571 \begin_layout Enumerate
15572 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15576 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15586 \begin_layout Subsection
15588 \begin_inset Index idx
15591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15600 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
15607 \begin_layout Standard
15608 Words aren't hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
15609 but automatically in the output.
15610 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15616 \begin_inset Index idx
15619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15626 following the rules of the document language
15630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 For German readers: That's one of the main differences between the languages
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15643 \begin_inset space ~
15650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15661 \begin_layout Standard
15663 hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15667 font and with unusual constructs, like
15668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15676 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
15677 can't break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
15678 This is done with the menu
15680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15681 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15683 \begin_inset space ~
15689 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15691 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15695 \begin_layout Standard
15696 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15697 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15708 would then see the hyphen
15709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15716 as a hyphenation possibility.
15717 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15718 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15719 as described in section
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Prevent Hyphenation
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15734 \begin_layout Subsection
15736 \begin_inset Index idx
15739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15749 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15752 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
15759 \begin_layout Standard
15760 When \SpecialChar LyX
15761 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15762 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15764 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15770 appropriate amount of space
15771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15775 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15777 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period as a word uses.
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15782 not work in all cases.
15784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15795 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15796 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15799 \begin_layout Standard
15800 Here are some examples of
15804 abbreviations and the end of a sentence:
15807 \begin_layout Itemize
15812 \begin_layout Itemize
15817 \begin_layout Standard
15818 And here's an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15821 \begin_layout Itemize
15823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15827 this is too much space!
15830 \begin_layout Itemize
15835 \begin_layout Standard
15836 You won't see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15839 \begin_layout Standard
15840 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15843 \begin_layout Enumerate
15847 \begin_inset space ~
15852 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15859 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
15864 \begin_inset Index idx
15867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15868 Spaces ! inter-word
15876 \begin_layout Enumerate
15880 \begin_inset space ~
15885 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15886 \begin_inset space ~
15890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15892 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
15897 \begin_inset Index idx
15900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15909 \begin_layout Enumerate
15913 \begin_inset space ~
15917 \begin_inset space ~
15921 \begin_inset space ~
15928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15930 \begin_inset space ~
15935 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15936 This function is also bound to
15939 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15945 \begin_layout Standard
15946 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15949 \begin_layout Itemize
15951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15955 \begin_inset space \space{}
15958 this is too much space!
15961 \begin_layout Itemize
15962 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
15966 \begin_layout Standard
15967 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15968 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
15970 will take care of this.
15973 \begin_layout Standard
15974 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15978 \begin_inset space ~
15984 feature described in section
15986 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
15991 Additional Features
15996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15998 \begin_inset Index idx
16001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16002 Typography ! Quotes
16008 \begin_inset Index idx
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16042 \begin_layout Standard
16044 usually sets quotes correctly.
16045 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16046 and use a closing quote at the end.
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16056 The keyboard character,
16060 , generates this automatically.
16063 \begin_layout Standard
16064 You can change the behavior of the
16068 key using the submenu
16074 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16078 \begin_inset Index idx
16081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16082 Document ! Settings
16090 \begin_layout Standard
16091 You can also select quotes for different languages in the box
16096 There are six choices:
16099 \begin_layout Labeling
16100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16112 Use quotes like this
16113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16121 \begin_inset Quotes els
16125 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16131 \begin_layout Labeling
16132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16135 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16139 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16145 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16149 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16153 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16159 \begin_layout Labeling
16160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16163 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16167 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16173 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16177 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16181 \begin_inset Quotes gls
16185 \begin_inset Quotes grs
16191 \begin_layout Labeling
16192 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16195 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16199 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16205 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16209 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16213 \begin_inset Quotes pls
16217 \begin_inset Quotes prs
16223 \begin_layout Labeling
16224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16227 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16231 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16237 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16241 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16245 \begin_inset Quotes fls
16249 \begin_inset Quotes frs
16255 \begin_layout Labeling
16256 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16259 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16263 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16269 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16273 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16277 \begin_inset Quotes als
16281 \begin_inset Quotes ars
16287 \begin_layout Standard
16288 These settings affect what character the
16295 \begin_layout Subsection
16297 \begin_inset Index idx
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 Typography ! Ligatures
16307 \begin_inset Index idx
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16341 name "subsec:Ligatures"
16348 \begin_layout Standard
16349 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16350 print them as single characters.
16351 These groups are known as
16356 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
16357 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
16359 Here are the standard ligatures:
16362 \begin_layout Itemize
16366 \begin_layout Itemize
16370 \begin_layout Itemize
16374 \begin_layout Itemize
16378 \begin_layout Itemize
16382 \begin_layout Standard
16383 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16386 \begin_layout Standard
16387 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16388 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16396 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16412 To break a ligature, use
16414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16415 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16417 \begin_inset space ~
16424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16435 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 \begin_layout Subsection
16462 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16464 \begin_inset Index idx
16467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16479 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16486 \begin_layout Standard
16489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16493 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
16496 \begin_layout Description
16498 The name of the game.
16501 \begin_layout Description
16503 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
16507 \begin_layout Description
16509 The \SpecialChar TeX
16510 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
16514 \begin_layout Description
16515 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
16516 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16521 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16527 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16535 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
16536 world to give programs geek version numbers.
16537 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
16538 converges to the number
16539 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16542 : The actual version is
16543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16551 , the previous one was
16552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16563 \begin_layout Subsection
16565 \begin_inset Index idx
16568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16577 \begin_layout Standard
16578 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16579 space between two words.
16580 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16590 for units use the menu
16592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16593 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16595 \begin_inset space ~
16603 arg "space-insert thin"
16609 \begin_layout Standard
16610 Here's an example to show the differences:
16613 \begin_layout Standard
16614 \begin_inset Tabular
16615 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16616 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16617 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16618 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16625 \begin_inset space ~
16629 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16641 space between number and unit
16648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16657 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16669 half space between number and unit
16682 \begin_layout Subsection
16684 \begin_inset Index idx
16687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16688 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16696 \begin_layout Standard
16697 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16699 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16700 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16701 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16702 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16703 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16704 These bits of text became known as
16715 \begin_layout Standard
16716 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
16717 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16718 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16719 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16720 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16721 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
16722 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there to
16723 specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16724 This is the advantage \SpecialChar LyX
16725 has in using \SpecialChar LaTeX
16729 \begin_layout Standard
16730 There's no way we can go into how \SpecialChar TeX
16731 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16732 decide to break a page, or how you
16733 can tweak that behavior.
16734 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
16735 books listed in the bibliography [such as
16736 \begin_inset space ~
16740 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16742 key "latexcompanion"
16747 \begin_inset space ~
16751 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16757 ] may have more information.
16758 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16761 \begin_layout Chapter
16762 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16765 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16772 \begin_layout Standard
16773 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16778 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16781 \begin_layout Section
16783 \begin_inset Index idx
16786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16802 \begin_layout Standard
16804 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16807 \begin_layout Description
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16813 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16814 \begin_inset Newline newline
16818 \begin_inset Note Note
16821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16822 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16830 \begin_layout Description
16831 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it appears as \SpecialChar LaTeX
16833 when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16836 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16837 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16840 \begin_inset space ~
16846 \begin_inset Newline newline
16850 \begin_inset Note Comment
16853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16854 This is text in a note box that only appears as comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
16863 \begin_layout Description
16865 \begin_inset space ~
16868 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16869 set in the document settings under
16871 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
16873 \begin_inset space ~
16879 \begin_inset Newline newline
16883 \begin_inset Newline newline
16887 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16896 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16897 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16902 of a comment that appears in the output.
16908 \begin_inset Newline newline
16912 \begin_inset Newline newline
16915 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
16916 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
16919 \begin_layout Standard
16920 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
16928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16932 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
16935 \begin_layout Section
16937 \begin_inset Index idx
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16949 name "sec:Footnotes"
16956 \begin_layout Standard
16958 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
16961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16964 or the toolbar button
16967 arg "footnote-insert"
16979 \begin_inset Graphics
16980 filename ../clipart/footnoteQt4.png
16989 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
16990 's representation of your footnote.
17000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17019 label, the box will
17023 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17024 Clicking on the box label again, will close
17037 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply mark it and click
17053 \begin_layout Standard
17054 Here is an example footnote:
17062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17063 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17071 \begin_layout Standard
17072 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17073 position where the footnote box is placed.
17074 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17075 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17077 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
17080 doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other schemes
17081 using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17087 ey are described in the
17094 \begin_layout Section
17096 \begin_inset Index idx
17099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17108 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17115 \begin_layout Standard
17116 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17118 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17122 \begin_inset space ~
17127 or the toolbar button
17130 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17133 , you will see a box with the label
17134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17141 appearing within your text.
17142 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17143 's representation of your marginal note.
17146 \begin_layout Standard
17147 At the side is an example marginal note.
17148 \begin_inset Marginal
17151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17152 This is a marginal note.
17160 \begin_layout Standard
17161 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17162 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17163 pages, right on odd pages.
17166 \begin_layout Standard
17167 For further information about marginal notes see section
17170 \begin_inset space ~
17178 \begin_inset space ~
17186 \begin_layout Section
17187 Graphics and Images
17188 \begin_inset Index idx
17191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17198 \begin_inset Index idx
17201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17210 name "sec:Graphics"
17217 \begin_layout Standard
17218 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17219 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17222 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17231 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17234 \begin_layout Standard
17235 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17240 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17241 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17243 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17244 \begin_inset space ~
17248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17250 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
17257 \begin_layout Standard
17262 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17263 of the image in the output.
17264 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17268 \begin_inset space ~
17272 \begin_inset space ~
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17285 \begin_inset space ~
17289 \begin_inset space ~
17294 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17295 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17303 \begin_layout Standard
17307 and \SpecialChar LyX
17310 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
17311 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
17313 You can also specify here the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
17318 \begin_inset space ~
17323 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17324 with the image size is printed.
17327 \begin_layout Standard
17328 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17329 The image will appear in the output exactly at the position where it is
17331 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17333 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
17339 \begin_layout Standard
17341 \begin_inset Graphics
17342 filename ../clipart/mobius.eps
17344 rotateOrigin center
17351 \begin_layout Standard
17352 If you need image captions and want to reference images, you have to put
17353 the image into a float, see section
17354 \begin_inset space ~
17358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17360 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
17367 \begin_layout Subsection
17369 \begin_inset Index idx
17372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17381 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
17388 \begin_layout Standard
17389 You can insert images in any known file format.
17390 But as we explained in section
17391 \begin_inset space ~
17395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17397 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17401 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17403 uses therefore the program
17407 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17408 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17409 you can use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17410 \begin_inset space ~
17414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17416 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17423 \begin_layout Standard
17424 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17427 \begin_layout Description
17429 \begin_inset space ~
17432 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17433 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17434 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17438 Graphics Interchange Format
17439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17442 (GIF, file extension
17443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17455 \begin_inset Index idx
17458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17490 Portable Network Graphics
17491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17494 (PNG, file extension
17495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17507 \begin_inset Index idx
17510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17542 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17546 (JPG, file extension
17547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17571 \begin_inset Index idx
17574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17605 \begin_layout Description
17607 \begin_inset space ~
17610 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17612 The scaling ability is necessary if you want to create presentations, because
17613 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17614 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17615 \begin_inset Newline newline
17618 Scalable image formats can be
17619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17622 Scalable Vector Graphics
17623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17626 (SVG, file extension
17627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17639 \begin_inset Index idx
17642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17674 Encapsulated PostScript
17675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17678 (EPS, file extension
17679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17691 \begin_inset Index idx
17694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17726 Portable Document Format
17727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17730 (PDF, file extension
17731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17743 \begin_inset Index idx
17746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17753 We say it can be, because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF
17754 or EPS and the result won't be scalable.
17755 In this cases only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17761 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17769 \begin_layout Standard
17770 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17774 \begin_layout Subsection
17775 Grouping of Image Settings
17776 \begin_inset Index idx
17779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17780 Images ! Settings grouping
17788 \begin_layout Standard
17789 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17791 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17792 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17794 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17795 need to manually change each of them.
17799 \begin_layout Standard
17800 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17803 \begin_inset space ~
17808 field in the Graphics dialog.
17809 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17810 by checking the name of the desired group.
17813 \begin_layout Section
17815 \begin_inset Index idx
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17834 \begin_layout Standard
17835 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17838 arg "tabular-insert"
17843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17847 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
17848 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
17849 from the rest of the table.
17850 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
17851 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
17853 Here's an example table:
17854 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
17860 \begin_layout Standard
17862 \begin_inset Tabular
17863 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
17864 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17867 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18068 \begin_layout Subsection
18072 \begin_layout Standard
18073 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button, which
18074 brings up the table dialog.
18075 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell and row/column respectively
18076 where the cursor is placed currently.
18077 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18078 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18079 done on all of your selection.
18082 \begin_layout Standard
18083 Additionally to the table dialog, the
18086 \begin_inset space ~
18091 helps you in setting table properties.
18092 It appears when the cursor is inside a table.
18095 \begin_layout Standard
18099 \begin_inset space ~
18104 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18105 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18106 current cell respectively.
18107 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18109 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18110 of text, see section
18111 \begin_inset space ~
18115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18117 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18124 \begin_layout Standard
18125 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18126 using the check box
18135 This will merge the cells to
18139 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18140 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18141 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18142 Here's an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18143 in the last row without the upper border:
18144 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18150 \begin_layout Standard
18152 \begin_inset Tabular
18153 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18154 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18155 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18156 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18169 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18178 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 \begin_layout Standard
18290 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18291 -arguments for the table.
18292 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18293 explained in the tables section of the
18296 \begin_inset space ~
18302 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18306 degrees counterclockwise.
18307 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18311 \begin_layout Standard
18312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18320 Most DVI-viewers are
18324 able to display rotations.
18332 \begin_layout Standard
18337 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18342 adds lines for all cell borders.
18345 \begin_layout Subsection
18347 \begin_inset Index idx
18350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18351 Tables ! Longtables
18357 \begin_inset Index idx
18360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18369 \begin_layout Standard
18370 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18373 \begin_inset space ~
18377 \begin_inset space ~
18386 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18387 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18390 \begin_layout Description
18395 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18396 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18397 except for the first page, if
18400 \begin_inset space ~
18408 \begin_layout Description
18412 \begin_inset space ~
18417 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18418 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18421 \begin_layout Description
18426 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18427 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18428 except for the last page, if
18431 \begin_inset space ~
18439 \begin_layout Description
18443 \begin_inset space ~
18448 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18449 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18452 \begin_layout Description
18453 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18454 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18460 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18463 \begin_inset space ~
18471 \begin_layout Standard
18472 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18473 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18474 of the fact that only the first one is used in the given table row.
18475 The others will then be defined as
18480 In this context, first means first in this order:
18483 \begin_inset space ~
18495 \begin_inset space ~
18501 See the following longtable to see how it works:
18502 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18508 \begin_layout Standard
18510 \begin_inset Tabular
18511 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18512 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18513 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18514 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18515 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18516 <row endfirsthead="true">
18517 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18523 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18528 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18537 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 <row endfirsthead="true">
18548 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18559 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18568 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 <row endhead="true">
18581 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18601 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18611 <row endhead="true">
18612 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18623 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18644 <row endfoot="true">
18645 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18656 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18665 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18696 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19637 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20441 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20565 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <row endlastfoot="true">
20627 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 \begin_layout Subsection
20666 \begin_inset Index idx
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20678 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
20685 \begin_layout Standard
20686 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20687 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20688 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20689 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20693 , etc.), nor set spacing options etc.
20694 for the cell's paragraph.
20697 \begin_layout Standard
20698 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20699 for the column in the table dialog.
20700 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20701 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20703 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
20709 \begin_layout Standard
20711 \begin_inset Tabular
20712 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20713 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20714 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20715 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20716 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 This is longer now.
20866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20918 This is longer now.
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 \begin_layout Standard
20950 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
20951 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
20957 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
20963 Selection with the mouse or with
20967 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
20968 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
20969 the selection from outside the table.
20972 \begin_layout Section
20974 \begin_inset Index idx
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20993 \begin_layout Subsection
20997 \begin_layout Standard
20998 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
20999 have a fixed location.
21001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21008 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21016 \begin_inset space ~
21021 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21022 too many notes on the page.
21025 \begin_layout Standard
21026 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21027 Images and tables can be spread evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21028 and pages without text.
21029 As the floating often destroys the context between the text and the image/table
21030 , every float can be referenced in the text.
21031 Floats are therefore numbered.
21032 Referencing is described in section
21033 \begin_inset space ~
21037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21039 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21046 \begin_layout Standard
21047 To insert a float, use the menu
21049 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21053 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21054 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21056 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21057 \begin_inset Index idx
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21069 paragraph within the float.
21070 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21071 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21072 left-clicking on the box label.
21073 A closed float box looks like this:
21074 \begin_inset Graphics
21075 filename ../clipart/floatQt4.png
21080 – a gray button with a red label.
21083 \begin_layout Standard
21084 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
21086 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21089 \begin_layout Subsection
21093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21097 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21102 \begin_inset Index idx
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 Floats ! Figure floats
21116 \begin_layout Standard
21118 \begin_inset space ~
21122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21124 reference "cap:Platypus"
21128 was created using the menu
21130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21131 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21134 or the toolbar button
21137 arg "float-insert figure"
21141 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21147 or the toolbar button
21150 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21154 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21155 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
21157 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21159 \begin_inset space ~
21164 or the toolbar button
21167 arg "layout-paragraph"
21173 \begin_layout Standard
21174 \begin_inset Float figure
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 \begin_inset Graphics
21182 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21197 name "cap:Platypus"
21201 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21214 \begin_layout Standard
21215 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21217 As described in section
21218 \begin_inset space ~
21222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21224 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21228 , you can simply insert a label in the caption using the menu
21230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21233 or the toolbar button
21239 and refer to it using the menu
21241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21244 or the toolbar button
21247 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21251 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21260 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21261 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21273 \begin_layout Standard
21274 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21275 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21276 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21277 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21278 as described in section
21279 \begin_inset space ~
21283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21285 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
21291 \begin_inset space ~
21295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21297 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21301 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21302 You can also set the images one below the other.
21304 \begin_inset space ~
21308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21310 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21317 reference "fig:Platypus"
21321 are the subfigures.
21324 \begin_layout Standard
21325 \begin_inset Float figure
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21331 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21335 \begin_inset Float figure
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21348 name "fig:Undefinable"
21360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 \begin_inset Graphics
21362 filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21377 \begin_inset Float figure
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21390 name "fig:Platypus"
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 \begin_inset Graphics
21404 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21416 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21428 name "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21432 Two distorted images.
21445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21447 \begin_inset Index idx
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 Floats ! Table floats
21461 \begin_layout Standard
21462 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21465 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21468 or the toolbar botton
21471 arg "float-insert table"
21475 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21478 \begin_inset space ~
21482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21484 reference "cap:Table-float"
21491 \begin_layout Standard
21492 \begin_inset Float table
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21503 name "cap:Table-float"
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21517 \begin_inset Tabular
21518 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21519 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21520 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21601 \end{array}\right]$
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21634 \begin_layout Subsection
21636 \begin_inset Index idx
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 \begin_layout Standard
21652 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21653 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21654 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21656 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21664 \begin_inset space ~
21672 \begin_layout Section
21674 \begin_inset Index idx
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21686 name "sec:Minipages"
21693 \begin_layout Standard
21695 provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page, called
21697 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21698 \begin_inset space ~
21705 \begin_layout Standard
21706 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
21707 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21713 Right-clicking on the box allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21714 and its alignment within the page.
21715 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
21721 \begin_layout Standard
21723 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21733 height_special "totalheight"
21738 backgroundcolor "none"
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 This is a minipage.
21745 The text is set in an italic style.
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
21752 another formatting.
21760 \begin_layout Standard
21761 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21764 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
21768 as described in section
21769 \begin_inset space ~
21773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21775 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
21780 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21786 \begin_layout Standard
21787 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21797 height_special "totalheight"
21802 backgroundcolor "none"
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21807 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21813 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21817 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21827 height_special "totalheight"
21832 backgroundcolor "none"
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21837 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21845 \begin_layout Standard
21846 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21852 \begin_layout Standard
21853 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can change the box from a minipage
21854 to other box types.
21855 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
21866 \begin_layout Chapter
21867 Mathematical Formulas
21868 \begin_inset Index idx
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 \begin_inset Index idx
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21912 name "cha:Mathematical-Formulas"
21919 \begin_layout Standard
21920 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21925 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21928 \begin_layout Section
21930 \begin_inset Index idx
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 \begin_layout Standard
21943 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
21950 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
21952 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
21953 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
21954 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
21956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21962 \begin_layout Standard
21963 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
21967 \begin_inset space ~
21972 , that appears when the cursor is in a formula.
21975 \begin_layout Standard
21976 There are two main types of formulas: Inline formulas appear within a text
21977 line, like this one:
21980 \begin_layout Standard
21981 This is a line with an inline formula
21982 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
21988 \begin_layout Standard
21989 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in an own paragraph
21991 \begin_inset Formula
21998 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22001 \begin_layout Standard
22003 supports also many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22010 \begin_inset space \space{}
22014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22027 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22028 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22032 So typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22035 \begin_inset space ~
22043 \begin_layout Subsection
22044 Navigating in Formulas
22045 \begin_inset Index idx
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 \begin_layout Standard
22058 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22059 achieved with the arrow keys.
22061 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22062 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22067 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22068 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22072 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22076 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22079 \end{array}\right]$
22087 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22092 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22093 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22096 \begin_layout Standard
22101 , printed in this document as
22102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22123 \begin_inset Note Note
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 This command will appear in the output as official character denoting the
22128 space character (visible space).
22133 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22134 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22135 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22140 For example, if you want
22141 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 , since in the latter case only the
22198 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22203 will be under the square root sign:
22204 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22210 \begin_layout Standard
22211 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22213 \begin_inset Formula
22215 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22224 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22225 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22228 \begin_layout Subsection
22232 \begin_layout Standard
22233 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22234 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22238 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22239 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22240 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22241 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22242 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
22246 \begin_layout Subsection
22247 Exponents and Subscripts
22248 \begin_inset Index idx
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 \begin_inset Index idx
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 \begin_layout Standard
22271 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22274 arg "math-superscript"
22280 arg "math-subscript"
22283 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22285 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22288 , type in a formula
22291 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22301 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22307 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22311 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22317 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22323 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22332 , you have to use an extra
22336 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22337 For example, if you want
22338 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22344 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22350 Subscripts are similar: To get
22351 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22357 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22365 \begin_layout Subsection
22367 \begin_inset Index idx
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 \begin_layout Standard
22380 Create a fraction with either the command
22389 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22395 \begin_inset space ~
22401 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22402 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22403 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22408 To move back up, press
22413 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22414 \begin_inset Formula
22416 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22419 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22427 \begin_layout Subsection
22429 \begin_inset Index idx
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 \begin_layout Standard
22442 Roots can be created using the
22445 \begin_inset space ~
22453 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22459 arg "math-insert \\root"
22481 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22487 always produces a square root.
22490 \begin_layout Subsection
22491 Operators with Limits
22492 \begin_inset Index idx
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 \begin_inset Index idx
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22518 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22525 \begin_layout Standard
22527 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22531 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22534 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22535 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
22536 by entering them as you would enter a super-
22537 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22538 The sum operator will automatically place its
22539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22546 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22548 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22552 \begin_inset Formula
22554 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22559 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22563 \begin_layout Standard
22564 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22566 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22567 behind the operator and using the menu
22569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22570 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
22572 \begin_inset space ~
22576 \begin_inset space ~
22590 \begin_layout Standard
22591 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22600 \begin_inset Index idx
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 \begin_inset Formula
22614 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22619 which will place the
22620 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22632 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22633 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22639 \begin_layout Standard
22640 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22647 Have a look at section
22648 \begin_inset space ~
22652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22654 reference "subsec:Functions"
22658 for an explanation of function macros.
22661 \begin_layout Subsection
22663 \begin_inset Index idx
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 \begin_layout Standard
22678 Most math symbols can be found in the
22681 \begin_inset space ~
22686 under one of several categories; including
22703 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22707 \begin_layout Standard
22708 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22709 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
22710 don't have to use the
22713 \begin_inset space ~
22718 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22720 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22723 \begin_layout Subsection
22725 \begin_inset Index idx
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 \begin_layout Standard
22740 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22746 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
22752 \begin_inset space ~
22760 arg "math-insert \\space"
22764 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22765 For example, the sequence
22770 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
22773 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
22775 \begin_inset Graphics
22776 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22781 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22782 the space marker and enter space again several times.
22783 With every space enter the size will be changed.
22784 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
22785 , because they are negative
22787 Here are two examples:
22790 \begin_layout Standard
22800 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22806 \begin_layout Standard
22816 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
22822 \begin_layout Subsection
22824 \begin_inset Index idx
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22838 name "subsec:Functions"
22845 \begin_layout Standard
22849 \begin_inset space ~
22854 contains under the button
22857 arg "math-insert \\functions"
22860 a number of function macros, such as
22861 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
22865 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
22873 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
22880 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
22881 avoid confusions, because
22882 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
22886 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
22892 \begin_layout Standard
22893 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
22895 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
22899 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
22905 \begin_layout Standard
22906 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
22907 are placed, as described in section
22908 \begin_inset space ~
22912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22914 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22921 \begin_layout Subsection
22923 \begin_inset Index idx
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22937 \begin_layout Standard
22938 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
22940 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
22941 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
22942 commands, for example, to enter
22943 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
22946 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
22947 Our example is entered by typing
22952 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22959 \begin_inset space ~
22963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22965 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
22969 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
22972 \begin_layout Standard
22973 \begin_inset Float table
22978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22986 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
22990 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23000 \begin_inset Tabular
23001 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23002 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23003 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23004 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23005 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23062 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23098 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23206 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23242 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23278 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23386 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23407 \begin_layout Standard
23408 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23411 \begin_inset space ~
23419 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23422 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23426 \begin_layout Section
23427 Brackets and Delimiters
23428 \begin_inset Index idx
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 \begin_inset Index idx
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23454 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23461 \begin_layout Standard
23462 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
23464 For some purposes, using just the keys
23469 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23470 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23471 toolbar delimiter icon
23474 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23478 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23479 \begin_inset Formula
23481 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23489 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23490 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23494 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23497 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23503 \begin_inset Formula
23505 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23513 \begin_layout Standard
23514 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23515 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23519 \begin_layout Standard
23520 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23521 left side and right side.
23522 If you use the option
23525 \begin_inset space ~
23530 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23531 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
23533 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23538 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
23539 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23542 \begin_layout Standard
23543 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23544 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23545 is to go inside the brackets.
23546 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23551 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23552 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23553 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
23557 arg "math-delim ( )"
23563 \begin_layout Section
23564 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23565 \begin_inset Index idx
23568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23577 \begin_inset Index idx
23580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 \begin_inset Index idx
23592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23603 \begin_layout Standard
23604 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23608 \begin_inset space ~
23616 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
23620 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23621 Here is an example:
23622 \begin_inset Formula
23624 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23633 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23634 \begin_inset space ~
23638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23640 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23645 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23646 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23647 This alignment is set in the box
23652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23701 for every column as default.
23702 For example, the sequence
23703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23714 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
23715 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
23716 corresponds to the relevant column.
23717 The result will look like this:
23718 \begin_inset Formula
23721 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
23722 column & has & has\,right\\
23723 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
23732 \begin_layout Standard
23733 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
23736 arg "newline-insert newline"
23739 while the cursor is in the matrix.
23740 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
23742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23745 or the math toolbar.
23748 \begin_layout Standard
23749 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
23750 It can be created with the menu
23752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23753 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23755 \begin_inset space ~
23767 Here is an example:
23768 \begin_inset Formula
23782 \begin_layout Standard
23783 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23786 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
23789 arg "newline-insert newline"
23793 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
23798 arg "newline-insert newline"
23801 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
23802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23809 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
23810 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
23811 A new row is created by every further entry of
23814 arg "newline-insert newline"
23818 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
23819 Here is an example:
23820 \begin_inset Formula
23822 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
23823 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
23828 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
23829 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
23830 \begin_inset Formula
23832 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
23840 \begin_layout Standard
23841 The multi-line formula type described here is called
23846 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
23847 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
23848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23850 reference "eq:asquared"
23855 The other types are described in section
23856 \begin_inset space ~
23860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23862 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
23869 \begin_layout Section
23870 Formula Numbering and Referencing
23871 \begin_inset Index idx
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 Math ! Formula numbering
23883 \begin_inset Index idx
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 Math ! Referencing formulas
23895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23897 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
23904 \begin_layout Standard
23905 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
23907 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23908 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23910 \begin_inset space ~
23914 \begin_inset space ~
23922 arg "math-number-toggle"
23926 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23927 within parentheses.
23928 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
23929 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
23930 the document class.
23931 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
23932 separated by a dot:
23933 \begin_inset Formula
23943 arg "math-number-toggle"
23946 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
23947 You can only number displayed formulas.
23950 \begin_layout Standard
23951 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
23953 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23954 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23956 \begin_inset space ~
23960 \begin_inset space ~
23968 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
23971 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
23972 \begin_inset Formula
23975 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
23981 To number all lines use the shortcut
23984 arg "math-number-toggle"
23990 \begin_layout Standard
23991 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23994 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
23995 A label is inserted with the menu
23997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24006 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24007 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24008 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24020 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24021 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24022 We inserted in the following example the label
24023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24030 in the second line:
24031 \begin_inset Formula
24033 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24034 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24039 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24040 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24041 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24045 \begin_inset space ~
24053 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24057 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24058 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24059 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24060 as the formula number:
24063 \begin_layout Standard
24064 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24067 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24074 \begin_layout Standard
24075 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24076 's cross-reference box are described in section
24077 \begin_inset space ~
24081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24083 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24088 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24096 \begin_layout Section
24097 User defined math macros
24098 \begin_inset Index idx
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 \begin_layout Standard
24114 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24115 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24116 Math macros are explained in section
24119 \begin_inset space ~
24131 \begin_layout Section
24135 \begin_layout Subsection
24137 \begin_inset Index idx
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 \begin_layout Standard
24152 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24153 To set a font in a formula, use the
24156 \begin_inset space ~
24164 arg "math-insert \\font"
24167 , or enter its command, listed in table
24168 \begin_inset space ~
24172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24174 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24181 \begin_layout Standard
24182 \begin_inset Float table
24187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24195 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24199 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 \begin_inset Tabular
24210 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24211 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24320 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24374 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24403 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24430 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 \begin_layout Standard
24465 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24473 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24489 \begin_layout Standard
24490 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24491 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24496 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24497 space when you need a space in the box.
24498 Here is an example where
24499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24510 denotes the set of numbers:
24511 \begin_inset Formula
24513 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
24521 \begin_layout Standard
24522 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24523 You can, for example, put a character in
24532 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24536 \begin_inset Newline newline
24539 So it is better not to use this feature.
24542 \begin_layout Standard
24543 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24544 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24548 \begin_inset Newline newline
24551 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24557 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24558 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24564 \begin_layout Standard
24571 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24574 \begin_layout Standard
24575 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24578 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24580 \begin_inset space ~
24588 \begin_layout Subsection
24590 \begin_inset Index idx
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24604 \begin_layout Standard
24605 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24607 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24611 \begin_inset space ~
24615 \begin_inset space ~
24623 \begin_inset space ~
24631 arg "math-insert \\font"
24635 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24636 in black instead of blue.
24637 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
24638 Here is an example:
24639 \begin_inset Formula
24642 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
24643 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
24652 \begin_layout Subsection
24654 \begin_inset Index idx
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 \begin_layout Standard
24669 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
24670 automatically chosen in most situations.
24688 For most characters,
24696 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
24697 and certain other structures, are set larger in
24702 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
24703 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
24704 thinks are appropriate.
24705 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
24708 arg "math-insert \\style"
24712 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
24713 For example, you can set
24714 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
24717 , which is normally in
24726 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
24730 The four styles are used in the following example:
24733 \begin_layout Standard
24734 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
24738 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
24742 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
24746 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
24752 \begin_layout Standard
24753 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
24754 is set in a particular size with the menu
24756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24758 \begin_inset space ~
24763 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
24764 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
24765 will be adjusted to correspond.
24766 As an example here is a formula in the font size
24767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24777 \begin_layout Standard
24780 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
24786 \begin_layout Section
24787 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24789 \begin_inset Index idx
24792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 \begin_inset Index idx
24804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24815 \begin_layout Standard
24817 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
24818 that are in common use.
24821 \begin_layout Subsection
24822 Enabling AMS-Support
24825 \begin_layout Standard
24826 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
24827 the document by selecting the checkbox
24830 \begin_inset space ~
24834 \begin_inset space ~
24838 \begin_inset space ~
24845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 \begin_inset Index idx
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 Document ! Settings
24863 \begin_inset space ~
24869 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
24870 -errors in formulas,
24871 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
24874 \begin_layout Subsection
24876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24878 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24883 \begin_inset Index idx
24886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24889 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24897 \begin_layout Standard
24898 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24899 provides a selection of different formula types.
24901 allows you to choose between
24922 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
24923 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24929 , for an explanation of these formula types.
24932 \begin_layout Chapter
24936 \begin_layout Section
24938 \begin_inset Index idx
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24952 name "sec:Cross-References"
24959 \begin_layout Standard
24960 One of \SpecialChar LyX
24961 's strengths is cross-references.
24962 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
24964 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
24965 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
24966 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
24969 \begin_layout Enumerate
24973 \begin_layout Enumerate
24974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24976 name "enu:Second-item"
24983 \begin_layout Enumerate
24987 \begin_layout Standard
24988 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
24990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24993 or by pressing the toolbar button
25000 A gray label box like this:
25001 \begin_inset Graphics
25002 filename ../clipart/labelQt4.png
25007 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25009 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25044 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25045 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25061 \begin_layout Standard
25062 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25067 or the toolbar button
25070 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25074 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25075 \begin_inset Graphics
25076 filename ../clipart/referenceQt4.png
25081 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25083 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25096 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25100 \begin_layout Standard
25101 As an alternative to
25103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25106 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25111 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25112 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25126 \begin_layout Standard
25127 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25128 \begin_inset space ~
25132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25134 reference "enu:Second-item"
25141 \begin_layout Standard
25142 It is recommended to use a protected space
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 described in section
25148 \begin_inset space ~
25152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25154 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
25163 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25164 line breaks between them.
25167 \begin_layout Standard
25168 There are six formats of cross-references:
25171 \begin_layout Description
25172 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25175 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25182 \begin_layout Description
25183 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25184 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25196 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25203 \begin_layout Description
25204 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25205 \begin_inset space ~
25209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25210 LatexCommand pageref
25211 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25218 \begin_layout Description
25220 \begin_inset space ~
25224 \begin_inset space ~
25227 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25229 LatexCommand vpageref
25230 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25235 \begin_inset Newline newline
25238 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25239 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25240 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25241 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25242 it prints “on the next page”.
25243 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25246 \begin_layout Description
25248 \begin_inset space ~
25252 \begin_inset space ~
25256 \begin_inset space ~
25259 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25262 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25267 \begin_inset Newline newline
25270 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25276 ; otherwise it behaves like
25280 \begin_inset space ~
25284 \begin_inset space ~
25293 \begin_layout Description
25295 \begin_inset space ~
25298 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25299 \begin_inset Newline newline
25303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25321 \begin_inset Index idx
25324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 -packages ! prettyref
25334 \begin_inset Index idx
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 -packages ! refstyle
25352 \begin_inset Newline newline
25355 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
25356 -package should be used for this feature by setting
25359 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25363 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25364 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25372 is the default and preferred because
25376 supports only English documents.
25377 The format is specified by using the command
25389 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25390 preamble of the document.
25391 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25404 ) can be done with this command
25405 \begin_inset Newline newline
25412 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25417 \begin_inset Newline newline
25420 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25422 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25424 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25431 \begin_layout Description
25433 \begin_inset space ~
25436 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25438 LatexCommand nameref
25439 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25446 \begin_layout Standard
25447 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25448 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
25450 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25454 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25458 \begin_layout Standard
25459 You can only use the style
25463 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25467 is always possible.
25470 \begin_layout Standard
25471 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25472 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25474 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25475 \begin_inset space ~
25479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25481 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25488 \begin_layout Standard
25489 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25493 \begin_inset space ~
25497 \begin_inset space ~
25502 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25503 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25506 \begin_inset space ~
25511 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25512 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25515 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25521 \begin_layout Standard
25522 You can change labels at any time.
25523 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25524 do not need to think about this.
25527 \begin_layout Standard
25528 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
25530 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
25534 \begin_layout Standard
25535 References are described in detail in the section
25536 \begin_inset space ~
25540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25550 \begin_inset space ~
25558 \begin_layout Section
25559 Table of Contents and other Listings
25560 \begin_inset Index idx
25563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25572 \begin_inset Index idx
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25593 \begin_layout Subsection
25595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25597 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
25604 \begin_layout Standard
25605 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25608 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
25610 \begin_inset space ~
25614 \begin_inset space ~
25620 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
25622 If you click on it, the
25626 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
25627 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
25628 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
25630 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
25632 \begin_inset space ~
25637 that is described in section
25638 \begin_inset space ~
25642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25644 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
25651 \begin_layout Standard
25652 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
25653 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
25655 \begin_inset space ~
25659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25661 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
25665 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
25667 \begin_inset space ~
25671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25673 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
25677 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
25679 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
25682 \begin_layout Subsection
25683 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
25684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25686 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25693 \begin_layout Standard
25694 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
25696 You can insert them via the
25698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25702 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
25705 \begin_layout Section
25706 URLs and Hyperlinks
25707 \begin_inset Index idx
25710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25719 \begin_inset Index idx
25722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25733 \begin_layout Subsection
25735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25744 \begin_layout Standard
25745 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
25747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25753 \begin_layout Standard
25754 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
25756 \begin_inset Flex URL
25759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25769 \begin_layout Standard
25770 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
25776 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
25780 \begin_layout Standard
25781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25789 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25798 \begin_layout Subsection
25800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25802 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
25809 \begin_layout Standard
25810 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
25812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25815 or with the toolbar button
25822 The appearing dialog has two fields:
25831 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
25832 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
25833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25835 name "LyX's homepage"
25836 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25840 , an Email address like this:
25841 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25843 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
25844 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
25849 , or a link to a file.
25852 \begin_layout Standard
25853 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
25855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25866 to the link target.
25869 \begin_layout Standard
25870 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
25871 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
25872 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
25873 the text style dialog.
25874 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
25878 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25880 name "LyX's homepage"
25881 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25888 \begin_layout Standard
25889 The link text color can be changed, when the option
25893 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
25895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25896 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25900 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
25902 \begin_inset Newline newline
25910 \begin_inset Newline newline
25917 in the PDF Properties dialog.
25920 \begin_layout Section
25922 \begin_inset Index idx
25925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25936 name "sec:Appendices"
25943 \begin_layout Standard
25944 Appendices are created with the menu
25946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25948 \begin_inset space ~
25952 \begin_inset space ~
25958 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
25959 as the appendix part of the book.
25960 This part is marked with a red borderline.
25963 \begin_layout Standard
25964 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
25965 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
25966 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
25967 and the subsection number.
25968 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
25972 \begin_layout Standard
25974 \begin_inset space ~
25978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25980 reference "chap:Credits"
25985 \begin_inset space ~
25989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25991 reference "subsec:Export"
25998 \begin_layout Section
26000 \begin_inset Index idx
26003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26014 name "sec:Bibliography"
26021 \begin_layout Standard
26022 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26024 You can include a bibliography database,
26028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26029 Known under the name
26030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26033 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26043 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26044 manually, using the paragraph environment
26048 , which was described in section
26049 \begin_inset space ~
26053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26055 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26060 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26061 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26065 use a bibliography database.
26068 \begin_layout Subsection
26069 The Bibliography Environment
26072 \begin_layout Standard
26077 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26079 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26088 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26090 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26100 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26103 \begin_layout Standard
26104 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26109 or the toolbar button
26112 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26116 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26117 containing the available citations.
26118 Select one or more keys from the list and
26128 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26129 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26133 \begin_layout Standard
26134 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26135 entry with surrounding brackets.
26140 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26141 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26153 \begin_layout Standard
26157 Companion Second Edition
26160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26162 key "latexcompanion"
26169 \begin_layout Standard
26170 The \SpecialChar LyX
26171 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
26172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26181 \begin_layout Standard
26182 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26185 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26195 arg "layout-paragraph"
26199 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26202 \begin_layout Subsection
26203 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26205 \begin_inset Index idx
26208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26211 Bibliography ! Databases
26217 \begin_inset Index idx
26220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26223 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26232 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26240 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26246 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26248 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26249 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26254 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26256 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26257 your working field in a database.
26258 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26259 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26260 list for that document.
26261 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 The database is a text file with the file extension
26267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26278 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26279 The format is explained in
26280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26286 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26288 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26290 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26295 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26296 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26297 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
26299 \begin_inset Flex URL
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26304 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26312 \begin_layout Standard
26313 To use a database, use the menu
26315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26320 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26322 \begin_inset space ~
26328 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26329 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26336 Add bibliography to TOC
26338 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26343 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26344 in the document or just the cited references.
26347 \begin_layout Standard
26348 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26360 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26361 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
26362 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26363 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26365 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26371 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26372 \begin_inset Newline newline
26376 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26378 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26390 \begin_layout Standard
26391 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26394 \begin_layout Standard
26395 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
26396 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26398 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
26405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26406 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
26412 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
26413 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
26417 The following variants are possible:
26420 \begin_layout Description
26421 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26422 with other bibliography packages (e.
26423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26427 \begin_inset space \space{}
26434 ), only with the package
26438 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26442 \begin_layout Description
26443 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26444 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26445 with all bibliography packages, except
26450 \begin_layout Description
26451 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26456 , works with all bibliography packages
26459 \begin_layout Standard
26460 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26461 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26463 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26466 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26470 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26480 When you select the option
26482 Sectioned bibliography
26486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26490 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26491 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26493 Customizing Bibliographies
26497 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26502 Additional Features
26507 \begin_layout Standard
26508 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26509 the two methods of creating them.
26510 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26511 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26512 We used the style file
26516 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26519 \begin_layout Subsection
26521 \begin_inset Index idx
26524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26527 Bibliography ! Citation format
26535 \begin_layout Standard
26536 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26537 For this feature you need to enable the option
26543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26547 \begin_inset Index idx
26550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26553 Document ! Settings
26563 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26564 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26565 style files as explained in
26566 the previous section.
26569 \begin_layout Standard
26570 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26571 the citation reference window.
26572 Here is an example where the text
26573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26584 appears after the reference:
26587 \begin_layout Standard
26589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26592 key "latexcompanion"
26599 \begin_layout Section
26601 \begin_inset Index idx
26604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26622 \begin_layout Standard
26623 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26627 \begin_inset space ~
26632 or the toolbar button
26639 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26640 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26641 by \SpecialChar LyX
26642 as the index entry.
26645 \begin_layout Standard
26646 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26649 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26651 \begin_inset space ~
26657 A light blue box labeled
26658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26669 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
26670 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
26674 \begin_layout Standard
26675 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
26676 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
26677 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
26678 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26680 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26682 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
26689 \begin_layout Subsection
26690 Grouping Index Entries
26691 \begin_inset Index idx
26694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26705 \begin_layout Standard
26706 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
26708 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
26709 lists under the entry
26710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26718 First we create the entry
26719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26727 \begin_inset space ~
26731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26733 reference "subsec:Lists"
26738 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
26739 \begin_inset space ~
26743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26745 reference "sec:Itemize"
26749 , we insert the command
26752 \begin_layout Standard
26758 \begin_layout Standard
26762 \begin_layout Standard
26768 \begin_layout Standard
26769 for the enumerated list in section
26770 \begin_inset space ~
26774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26776 reference "sec:Enumerate"
26783 \begin_layout Standard
26784 The exclamation mark
26785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26792 marks the grouping levels.
26793 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
26794 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
26795 If we don't have an index entry for
26796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26803 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
26806 \begin_layout Subsection
26808 \begin_inset Index idx
26811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26814 Index ! Page ranges
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26823 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
26825 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
26826 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
26827 an index entry in section
26828 \begin_inset space ~
26832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26834 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
26841 \begin_layout Standard
26844 Paragraph environments|(
26847 \begin_layout Standard
26848 and another entry at the end of section
26849 \begin_inset space ~
26853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26855 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
26862 \begin_layout Standard
26865 Paragraph environments|)
26868 \begin_layout Standard
26870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26893 respectively start and end the index range.
26894 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
26895 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
26896 the pages of the indexed document parts.
26897 An example is the index entry
26898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26901 Document ! Settings
26902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26908 \begin_layout Subsection
26910 \begin_inset Index idx
26913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 Index ! Cross referencing
26924 \begin_layout Standard
26925 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
26926 We referred for example in the index entry
26927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26935 \begin_inset space ~
26939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26941 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
26945 ) to the index entry
26946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26953 in the same section using the entry
26956 \begin_layout Standard
26959 GIF|see{Image formats}
26962 \begin_layout Standard
26963 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
26965 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
26966 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
26969 \begin_layout Subsection
26971 \begin_inset Index idx
26974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26977 Index ! Entry order
26985 \begin_layout Standard
26986 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
26987 follow the rules for the index order.
26988 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26994 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
26996 \begin_inset space ~
27000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27002 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27011 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27012 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27037 \begin_inset Index idx
27040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27043 Dummy entries ! maïs
27049 \begin_inset Index idx
27052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27055 Dummy entries ! maître
27061 \begin_inset Index idx
27064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27067 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27072 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27073 maïs, maison, maître.
27074 To achieve this, we use the command
27077 \begin_layout Standard
27080 previous entry@current entry
27083 \begin_layout Standard
27084 In our case we want to have
27085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27100 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27103 \begin_layout Standard
27109 \begin_layout Standard
27110 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27111 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27113 See the next subsection for an example.
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27123 \begin_layout Standard
27124 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27129 to generate the index (see sec.
27130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27136 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27145 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27146 -package aeguill in sec.
27147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27153 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
27157 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
27158 -packages although all these index
27159 commands start with
27160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27173 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27178 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27181 \begin_layout Standard
27193 \begin_layout Standard
27205 \begin_layout Subsection
27207 \begin_inset Index idx
27210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27213 Index ! Entry layout
27221 \begin_layout Standard
27222 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27223 \begin_inset Index idx
27226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27231 This is an italic dummy entry
27236 You can also format the page number using the character
27237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27244 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27245 -command without a backslash.
27246 We can write for example
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27252 italic page number:|textit
27255 \begin_layout Standard
27256 to get the page number in italic.
27257 \begin_inset Index idx
27260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27263 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27268 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
27269 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
27271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27287 \begin_inset space ~
27293 Have a look at section
27294 \begin_inset space ~
27298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27300 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27304 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27308 \begin_layout Standard
27309 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27321 to generate the index, see sec.
27322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27328 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27337 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27342 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27343 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27346 key "latexcompanion"
27358 \begin_layout Standard
27359 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27361 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27362 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27363 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27364 If so, put the following in the preamble
27367 \begin_layout Standard
27379 \begin_layout Standard
27383 \begin_layout Standard
27389 \begin_layout Standard
27390 in the index entry.
27391 \begin_inset Index idx
27394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27397 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27402 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27403 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27404 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27407 \begin_layout Standard
27408 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27409 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27410 a bold font for all index entries.
27411 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27423 documentation for details,
27424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27426 key "makeindex,xindy"
27433 \begin_layout Subsection
27435 \begin_inset Index idx
27438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27449 name "subsec:Index-Program"
27456 \begin_layout Standard
27457 If the index generation program
27461 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
27462 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27466 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
27467 distribution, is used.
27471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27476 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27477 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27478 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27479 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27480 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27490 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
27492 dialog, see section
27493 \begin_inset space ~
27497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27499 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
27504 The available options are listed and explained in
27505 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27507 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
27512 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27516 \begin_layout Standard
27517 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27518 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
27521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27522 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27526 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27527 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27530 \begin_layout Subsection
27534 \begin_layout Standard
27535 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27536 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27544 next to the standard index.
27546 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27547 that add this feature.
27554 \begin_inset Index idx
27557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27561 -packages ! splitidx
27566 package to generate multiple indexes.
27567 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
27572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27573 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
27575 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27582 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27583 style, but it also includes
27584 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27585 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
27595 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27598 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27601 and select the option
27603 Use multiple Indexes
27610 already contains the standard index
27611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27619 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27620 also appear as a heading) to the
27624 input field and press the
27629 The new index now also appears in the list.
27630 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
27631 label color to the new index.
27634 \begin_layout Standard
27635 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27645 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27646 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27647 are additional features:
27650 \begin_layout Itemize
27651 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27652 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
27655 \begin_layout Itemize
27656 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27657 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
27658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27665 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27666 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
27667 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
27668 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
27671 \begin_layout Section
27672 Nomenclature/Glossary
27673 \begin_inset Index idx
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27685 \begin_inset Index idx
27688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27721 name "sec:Nomenclature"
27728 \begin_layout Standard
27729 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
27730 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
27731 called nomenclature or glossary.
27734 \begin_layout Standard
27735 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27742 \begin_inset Index idx
27745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27749 -packages ! nomencl
27755 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
27757 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27763 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27767 \begin_layout Standard
27768 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
27769 and then use the menu
27771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27777 \begin_inset space ~
27782 or the toolbar button
27785 arg "nomencl-insert"
27790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27801 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27805 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
27806 The first is the term or
27810 that you wish to define.
27815 of the term or symbol.
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27827 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
27828 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
27836 \begin_layout Subsection
27837 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
27838 \begin_inset Index idx
27841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27844 Nomenclature ! Layout
27852 \begin_layout Standard
27853 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
27857 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
27860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27864 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27872 \begin_inset Newline newline
27880 \begin_inset Newline newline
27886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27893 character starts/ends the formula.
27894 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
27895 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
27897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27907 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
27917 \begin_layout Standard
27918 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27919 -syntax is given in section
27920 \begin_inset space ~
27924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27926 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27933 \begin_layout Standard
27937 \begin_inset space ~
27942 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27944 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
27945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27949 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27956 in this document is:
27957 \begin_inset Newline newline
27962 dummy entry for the character
27967 \begin_inset Newline newline
27979 \begin_inset space ~
27989 font use the command
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28019 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28024 \begin_inset space \space{}
28028 \begin_inset Newline newline
28044 \begin_inset Newline newline
28047 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28048 This command will make the font of all symbols
28055 \begin_inset space ~
28063 \begin_layout Standard
28064 If the characters |
28065 \begin_inset space \space{}
28069 \begin_inset space \space{}
28073 \begin_inset space \space{}
28077 \begin_inset space \space{}
28081 \begin_inset space \space{}
28084 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28085 a quote character in front of them.
28086 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28087 LatexCommand nomenclature
28088 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28089 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28096 \begin_layout Subsection
28097 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28098 \begin_inset Index idx
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28104 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28112 \begin_layout Standard
28113 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28114 -code of the symbol
28116 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28118 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28121 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28122 LatexCommand nomenclature
28124 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28131 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28135 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28136 LatexCommand nomenclature
28139 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28144 They will be sorted by
28145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28171 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28174 will be sorted before the
28178 since the character
28179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28186 is considered in sorting.
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28190 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28193 \begin_inset space ~
28198 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28199 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28201 For the example given, you can insert
28205 in this field for the
28206 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28213 will be located before
28214 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28220 \begin_layout Standard
28221 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28235 \begin_layout Subsection
28236 Nomenclature Options
28237 \begin_inset Index idx
28240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28243 Nomenclature ! Options
28251 \begin_layout Standard
28256 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28257 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28260 \begin_layout Description
28261 refeq Appends the phrase
28262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28277 to every nomenclature entry, where
28283 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28286 \begin_layout Description
28287 refpage Appends the phrase
28288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28303 to every nomenclature entry, where
28309 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28312 \begin_layout Description
28313 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28316 \begin_layout Standard
28317 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28318 class options list in the
28320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28324 In this document the options
28331 \begin_layout Standard
28332 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28338 \begin_layout Standard
28339 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28340 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28345 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28348 \begin_layout Description
28358 \begin_layout Description
28361 nomrefpage Like the
28368 \begin_layout Description
28371 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28380 \begin_layout Description
28384 \begin_inset space ~
28390 \begin_inset space ~
28395 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28398 \begin_layout Standard
28400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28407 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28408 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28412 \begin_layout Standard
28420 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28423 \begin_inset Newline newline
28430 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28435 \begin_inset Newline newline
28439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28454 by their translation.
28457 \begin_layout Subsection
28458 Printing the Nomenclature
28459 \begin_inset Index idx
28462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28465 Nomenclature ! Printing
28473 \begin_layout Standard
28474 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28477 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28493 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28494 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28495 You can choose between these settings:
28498 \begin_layout Description
28499 Default a space of 1
28500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28506 \begin_layout Description
28508 \begin_inset space ~
28512 \begin_inset space ~
28515 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28518 \begin_layout Description
28519 Custom custom space
28522 \begin_layout Standard
28523 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28532 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28540 For example, in order to change the name to
28544 , add the following line to the preamble:
28547 \begin_layout Standard
28554 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28557 \begin_layout Subsection
28558 Nomenclature Program
28559 \begin_inset Index idx
28562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28565 Nomenclature ! Program
28571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28573 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
28580 \begin_layout Standard
28586 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28587 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28589 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28594 by adding options, see section
28595 \begin_inset space ~
28599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28601 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28606 The available options are listed and explained in
28607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28609 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28616 \begin_layout Section
28618 \begin_inset Index idx
28621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28630 \begin_inset Index idx
28633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28636 Document ! Branches
28642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28644 name "sec:Branches"
28651 \begin_layout Standard
28652 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28653 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28654 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28655 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
28660 allows you to put text into branches.
28661 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28662 To create a branch, either select the menu
28664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28665 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
28668 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28677 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28678 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28679 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
28680 and whether the name of the branch should
28681 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28682 (see below for an example).
28683 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28684 to the name of the other) and to add
28685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28697 \begin_inset space ~
28700 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28701 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28704 \begin_layout Standard
28705 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28706 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28711 where you can choose a branch.
28712 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28716 \begin_layout Standard
28717 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28718 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28721 \begin_layout Standard
28722 \begin_inset Branch Question
28725 \begin_layout Standard
28728 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28736 \begin_layout Standard
28737 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28740 \begin_layout Standard
28743 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28751 \begin_layout Standard
28758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28759 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28762 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28763 Consider for example a file
28764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28771 which has the above branches.
28773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 is active, the PDF export file would be called
28781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28804 branch were inactive,
28805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28820 branch was active, likewise
28821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28836 branch was active, and
28837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28840 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
28841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28844 if both branches were active.
28845 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
28848 \begin_layout Standard
28849 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28855 \begin_layout Standard
28856 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
28857 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
28858 definitions for each branch.
28859 For example you can define for the question branch
28863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28864 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28865 -syntax, see section
28866 \begin_inset space ~
28870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28872 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28884 \begin_layout Standard
28894 \begin_layout Standard
28904 \begin_layout Standard
28905 and for the answer branch
28908 \begin_layout Standard
28918 \begin_layout Standard
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 \begin_inset Branch Question
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28966 \begin_layout Standard
28967 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28970 \begin_layout Standard
28976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29004 \begin_layout Standard
29005 Now it is possible to use the
29009 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29016 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29019 commands to obtain conditional output.
29020 Here is an example formula where only the
29027 \begin_inset Formula
29029 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29037 \begin_layout Standard
29038 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29046 \begin_layout Standard
29047 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29053 \begin_inset space \space{}
29056 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29058 For this advanced usage, see the
29063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29066 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29073 \begin_layout Section
29075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29077 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29082 \begin_inset Index idx
29085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29096 \begin_layout Standard
29099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29103 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29105 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29111 \begin_inset Index idx
29114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29118 -packages ! hyperref
29123 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29124 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29125 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29126 part of the document.
29130 \begin_layout Standard
29131 The header information in the dialog tab
29135 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29136 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29137 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29138 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29142 \begin_inset space ~
29146 \begin_inset space ~
29151 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29152 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29153 and author entries.
29157 \begin_inset space ~
29161 \begin_inset space ~
29165 \begin_inset space ~
29170 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29173 \begin_layout Standard
29174 You can specify in the dialog tab
29178 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29183 \begin_inset space ~
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29191 \begin_inset space ~
29196 option allows long links to be split;
29199 \begin_inset space ~
29203 \begin_inset space ~
29207 \begin_inset space ~
29215 \begin_inset space ~
29220 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29223 \begin_inset space ~
29228 colors the different links.
29229 The default colors are:
29232 \begin_layout Labeling
29233 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29238 for hyperlinks and URLs
29241 \begin_layout Labeling
29242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29250 \begin_layout Labeling
29251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29259 \begin_layout Standard
29260 but you can change these in the field
29265 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29271 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29274 \begin_layout Standard
29279 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29280 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29281 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29284 \begin_layout Standard
29289 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29290 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29291 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29301 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29302 when opening the PDF.
29304 \begin_inset space ~
29307 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29308 \begin_inset space ~
29311 1 will only display the sections.
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29315 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29316 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29322 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29323 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29332 \begin_layout Section
29334 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29338 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29345 \begin_layout Subsection
29348 \begin_inset Index idx
29351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29363 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 As \SpecialChar LyX
29372 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
29373 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29374 commands and constructs,
29377 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29378 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29379 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29380 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29381 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
29382 cannot support all packages and
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29387 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
29388 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
29389 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
29393 Code box is created by the menu
29395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29397 \begin_inset space ~
29402 or by the toolbar button
29415 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29423 \begin_layout Standard
29424 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
29426 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
29428 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29429 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29436 , you can write the command part
29442 in a \SpecialChar TeX
29443 Code box before the word and the closing brace
29447 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
29448 Code box behind the word.
29449 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
29450 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29455 \begin_inset Graphics
29456 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29468 \begin_layout Standard
29469 This is a line with a
29473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29496 \begin_layout Standard
29497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29505 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29506 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29507 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
29508 know that the command is finished.
29516 \begin_layout Subsection
29517 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29519 \begin_inset Argument 1
29522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29525 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29532 \begin_inset Index idx
29535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29547 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29555 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29556 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29557 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
29558 uses in the background.
29559 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
29560 is based on commands, you can
29561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29569 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29570 any time if you know the right commands.
29571 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29572 is the end of the day.
29573 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29574 all caption labels bold.
29575 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29577 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29581 \begin_layout Standard
29582 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
29584 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29586 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29599 As result you find that the package
29604 \begin_inset Index idx
29607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29611 -packages ! caption
29617 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29622 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29626 \begin_inset space ~
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29639 usepackage[options]{package name}
29642 \begin_layout Standard
29643 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
29644 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29645 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29646 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29649 \begin_layout Standard
29650 In your case the package name is
29655 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29660 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29661 So you add the command
29664 \begin_layout Standard
29669 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29672 \begin_layout Standard
29673 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29678 For more commands provided by the
29682 package, have a look at its documentation,
29683 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29697 \begin_layout Standard
29698 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29700 For example if you use a
29704 class, you don't need the package
29708 , you can instead write
29711 \begin_layout Standard
29716 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29722 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29723 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29724 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29731 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29734 \begin_layout Standard
29735 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29736 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29738 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29739 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
29740 Code box as described in the previous
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29746 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29749 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29751 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29758 \begin_layout Standard
29759 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29765 \begin_layout Standard
29769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29779 \begin_inset Note Note
29782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29785 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29793 \begin_layout Left Header
29794 \begin_inset Argument 1
29797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29817 \begin_inset Note Note
29820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29823 defines the header line as described below
29831 \begin_layout Center Header
29832 \begin_inset Argument 1
29835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29844 \begin_layout Right Header
29845 \begin_inset Argument 1
29848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29871 \begin_layout Left Footer
29872 \begin_inset Argument 1
29875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29898 \begin_layout Center Footer
29899 \begin_inset Argument 1
29902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29915 \begin_inset Newline newline
29919 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
29925 \begin_layout Right Footer
29926 \begin_inset Argument 1
29929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29951 \begin_layout Section
29952 Customized Page Headers and Footers
29953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29955 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
29960 \begin_inset Index idx
29963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29966 Document ! Header/Footer line
29972 \begin_inset Index idx
29975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29986 \begin_layout Standard
29987 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
29991 \begin_inset space ~
30002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30014 As a second step add in the menu
30016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30017 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30024 Custom Header/Footerlines
30025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30029 This module offers the following 6
30030 \begin_inset space ~
30036 \begin_layout Description
30038 \begin_inset space ~
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30046 \begin_inset space ~
30050 \begin_inset space ~
30054 \begin_inset space ~
30060 \begin_layout Description
30062 \begin_inset space ~
30066 \begin_inset space ~
30070 \begin_inset space ~
30074 \begin_inset space ~
30078 \begin_inset space ~
30084 \begin_layout Standard
30085 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30089 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30090 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30092 \begin_inset space ~
30096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30098 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30102 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30105 \begin_layout Standard
30106 \begin_inset Float figure
30112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30115 \begin_inset Tabular
30116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30118 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30120 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30140 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30169 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30180 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30184 The normal text on the page goes here.
30185 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30187 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30188 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30193 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30202 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30231 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30242 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30260 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30278 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30285 name "fig:Page-layout"
30289 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30302 \begin_layout Standard
30303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30311 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30315 \begin_inset space ~
30320 is set to “Default”.
30321 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30330 \begin_layout Subsection
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30335 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30336 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30337 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30338 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30340 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30341 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30345 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
30346 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30352 \begin_inset space ~
30360 \begin_layout Description
30363 thepage prints the current page number
30366 \begin_layout Description
30369 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30372 \begin_layout Description
30375 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30378 \begin_layout Description
30381 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30382 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30389 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30392 because it usually goes in a left header.
30395 \begin_layout Description
30398 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30399 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30401 It is normally used in the right header.
30404 \begin_layout Subsection
30405 Default header/footer
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30409 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30410 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30411 footer has the page number.
30412 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30413 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30414 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30417 \begin_inset space ~
30425 \begin_layout Subsection
30429 \begin_layout Standard
30430 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30431 Some pages are different.
30432 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30433 a new part or chapter in your book.
30434 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30435 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30436 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30440 Header and footer decoration line
30443 \begin_layout Standard
30444 By default, you get a 0.4
30445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30448 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30449 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30461 in the following way:
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30471 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30474 \begin_layout Standard
30475 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30484 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30494 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30495 \begin_inset space ~
30499 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30509 Several header/footer lines
30512 \begin_layout Standard
30513 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30514 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30515 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30517 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30532 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30533 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 \begin_inset space ~
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30561 headheight}{height}
30564 \begin_layout Standard
30565 where height is a size in standard units.
30566 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30567 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30568 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30569 logfile with the menu
30571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30582 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30587 \begin_inset Index idx
30590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 -packages ! fancyhdr
30600 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30601 for your header/footer.
30604 \begin_layout Subsection
30608 \begin_layout Standard
30609 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30610 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30611 This example consists of the following definition:
30614 \begin_layout Description
30616 \begin_inset space ~
30625 , empty optional argument
30628 \begin_layout Description
30630 \begin_inset space ~
30633 Header empty, empty optional argument
30636 \begin_layout Description
30638 \begin_inset space ~
30647 in the optional argument
30650 \begin_layout Description
30652 \begin_inset space ~
30661 in the optional argument
30664 \begin_layout Description
30666 \begin_inset space ~
30679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30683 \begin_inset Newline newline
30687 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30694 in the optional argument
30697 \begin_layout Description
30699 \begin_inset space ~
30708 , empty optional argument
30711 \begin_layout Description
30714 headrulewidth set to 2
30715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30721 \begin_layout Standard
30722 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30723 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30729 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30738 \begin_layout Standard
30739 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30745 \begin_layout Standard
30749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30753 pagestyle{headings}
30759 \begin_inset Note Note
30762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30765 switches back to page style with the default headings
30773 \begin_layout Section
30774 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30777 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30782 \begin_inset Index idx
30785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30794 \begin_inset Index idx
30797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30808 \begin_layout Standard
30810 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
30811 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30812 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30815 \begin_layout Subsection
30819 \begin_layout Standard
30820 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30826 \begin_inset Index idx
30829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30833 -packages ! preview-latex
30838 (on some systems named simply
30843 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30845 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30851 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30853 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30861 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
30862 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30863 -package are automatically
30864 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
30868 \begin_layout Subsection
30872 \begin_layout Standard
30873 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
30874 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30876 activate the option
30879 \begin_inset space ~
30886 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30892 \begin_inset space ~
30896 \begin_inset space ~
30899 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
30906 \begin_inset space ~
30919 \begin_inset space ~
30924 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30927 \begin_layout Standard
30928 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30933 \begin_inset space ~
30941 \begin_inset space ~
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30950 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
30951 and when you finish
30955 \begin_layout Standard
30956 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30964 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
30965 generated by activating the option
30968 \begin_inset space ~
30974 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
30982 \begin_layout Subsection
30983 Selected document parts
30986 \begin_layout Standard
30987 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
30988 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
30989 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
30990 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
30992 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
30994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30998 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
30999 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31000 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31003 \begin_layout Standard
31004 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31011 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31023 is explained in section
31025 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31030 \begin_inset space ~
31040 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31041 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31042 the final rotated boxes,
31043 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31044 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31046 Here is the result:
31049 \begin_layout Standard
31050 \begin_inset Preview
31052 \begin_layout Standard
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31063 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31069 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31079 height_special "totalheight"
31084 backgroundcolor "none"
31087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31114 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31120 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 \begin_layout Standard
31143 Previewing works also for colors.
31144 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31163 is explained in section
31170 \begin_inset space ~
31183 \begin_layout Standard
31184 \begin_inset Preview
31186 \begin_layout Standard
31192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31211 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31216 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31235 \begin_layout Standard
31236 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31242 \begin_layout Standard
31243 If \SpecialChar LyX
31244 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31245 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31246 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31247 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31248 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31249 the \SpecialChar TeX
31251 If \SpecialChar LyX
31252 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31253 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31255 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31256 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31257 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31260 \begin_layout Subsection
31265 \begin_layout Standard
31266 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31267 source of the whole document or parts of it.
31270 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31272 \begin_inset space ~
31277 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31279 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31281 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
31282 's main window, then only this selection
31283 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31284 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31285 the source view window.
31290 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
31291 ; but note that if you have
31292 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
31294 not just the one which is open at the time.
31297 \begin_layout Section
31298 Advanced Find and Replace
31299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31301 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31306 \begin_inset Index idx
31309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31318 \begin_inset Index idx
31321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31332 \begin_layout Subsection
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31337 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
31338 allows for searching of complex,
31339 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
31341 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31342 The key-features are:
31345 \begin_layout Itemize
31346 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31347 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31348 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31352 \begin_layout Itemize
31353 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31354 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31355 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31356 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31359 \begin_layout Itemize
31360 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31361 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31362 outside of mathematics environments
31365 \begin_layout Itemize
31366 Search may be widened to a specific
31371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31375 \begin_inset space ~
31378 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31379 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31386 \begin_layout Itemize
31387 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31388 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31393 \begin_inset space ~
31396 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31399 \begin_layout Subsection
31403 \begin_layout Standard
31404 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31406 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31419 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31422 ) or the toolbar button
31425 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31431 Advanced Find and Replace
31436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31440 \begin_layout Standard
31446 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31450 \begin_inset space ~
31455 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31458 arg "paragraph-break"
31462 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31463 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31467 arg "paragraph-break"
31470 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31474 searches backwards.
31477 \begin_layout Standard
31481 \begin_inset space ~
31486 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31495 \begin_inset space ~
31500 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31503 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31504 Searching for mathematics
31507 \begin_layout Standard
31508 Mathematical formulas, such as
31509 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31512 or something more complex like
31513 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31516 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31521 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31522 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31523 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31524 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31534 \begin_layout Standard
31535 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31536 This is done by switching to the
31540 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31545 This way, entering in the
31552 \begin_layout Itemize
31553 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31554 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31557 \begin_layout Itemize
31558 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31559 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31562 \begin_layout Itemize
31563 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31564 of it only within section headings.
31565 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31566 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31570 \begin_layout Itemize
31571 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31572 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31579 \begin_layout Standard
31580 The entries made in the
31584 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31587 \begin_inset space ~
31593 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31597 button or alternatively press
31600 arg "paragraph-break"
31607 while the cursor is in the
31610 \begin_inset space ~
31618 \begin_layout Standard
31619 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
31621 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31625 \begin_layout Itemize
31626 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31627 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31635 with its typewriter version
31636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31650 \begin_layout Itemize
31651 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31657 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31669 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31676 (you may want to enable the
31679 \begin_inset space ~
31687 \begin_inset space ~
31692 options and disable the
31700 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31708 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31709 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31713 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
31716 , or occurrences of
31717 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31721 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31727 \begin_layout Subsection
31731 \begin_layout Standard
31732 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31737 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31739 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31741 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31750 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31756 This is done with the context menu
31758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31759 Insert Regular Expression
31761 while the cursor is in the
31766 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31767 expression matching rules
31771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31772 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
31775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31779 \begin_inset space ~
31782 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
31783 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
31789 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31790 same text in the document.
31791 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31792 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31795 \begin_layout Enumerate
31796 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31801 editor the fraction
31802 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31806 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31809 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31810 fractions with the given denominator.
31813 \begin_layout Enumerate
31814 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31826 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31831 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
31832 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
31833 Also, by inserting a
31834 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31837 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31838 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31841 \begin_layout Standard
31842 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31843 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31844 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31847 , and referring back to them through
31848 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31852 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31856 For example, try searching with the regexp
31857 \begin_inset Newline newline
31860 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31863 \begin_inset Newline newline
31866 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31869 \begin_layout Standard
31870 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31873 \begin_layout Standard
31874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31882 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31883 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31884 sub-expressions is absolute.
31886 \begin_inset space ~
31890 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31893 always refers to the first occurrence of
31894 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31897 in all entered regexps.
31905 \begin_layout Section
31907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31909 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31914 \begin_inset Index idx
31917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31928 \begin_layout Standard
31930 has a built-in spell checker.
31933 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31940 key or the toolbar button
31943 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31946 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
31947 beginning of the currently selected text.
31948 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31949 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31950 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31951 scrolled so that it is visible.
31952 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31953 n, if any could be found.
31954 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31958 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
31959 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31963 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31970 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31971 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31973 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31974 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
31977 \begin_inset space ~
31985 arg "dialog-show character"
31988 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31990 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31993 \begin_layout Standard
31994 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31995 can be downloaded from here:
31996 \begin_inset Newline newline
32000 \begin_inset Flex URL
32003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32005 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32011 \begin_inset Newline newline
32015 \begin_inset space ~
32018 files for each language.
32019 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32020 \begin_inset space ~
32023 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32024 's installation subfolder
32032 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32034 \begin_inset Newline newline
32037 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32038 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32039 but in most cases these are
32055 is the language code.
32058 \begin_layout Subsection
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32065 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32066 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32068 \begin_inset space ~
32071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32074 you can set the following things:
32077 \begin_layout Description
32079 \begin_inset space ~
32082 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32083 should use for spell checking.
32084 Depending on your platform,
32098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32099 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32100 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32115 \begin_inset space ~
32118 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32121 \begin_layout Description
32123 \begin_inset space ~
32126 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32127 will always use the given language
32128 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32131 \begin_layout Description
32133 \begin_inset space ~
32136 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32142 \begin_inset space \space{}
32146 This should normally not be needed.
32149 \begin_layout Description
32151 \begin_inset space ~
32155 \begin_inset space ~
32158 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32170 \begin_layout Description
32172 \begin_inset space ~
32175 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32176 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32177 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32178 appear in a context menu.
32179 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32183 \begin_layout Description
32185 \begin_inset space ~
32189 \begin_inset space ~
32193 \begin_inset space ~
32196 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32200 \begin_layout Section
32202 \begin_inset Index idx
32205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32216 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32225 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32226 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32238 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32247 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32249 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32250 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32251 which are available for many languages.
32254 \begin_layout Standard
32255 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32256 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32260 \begin_layout Subsection
32261 Setting up the thesaurus
32264 \begin_layout Standard
32273 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32277 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32282 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32288 \begin_inset space ~
32296 For instance, the US English files are named:
32299 \begin_layout Itemize
32303 \begin_layout Itemize
32307 \begin_layout Standard
32316 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32317 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
32320 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32321 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32322 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32324 \begin_inset space ~
32329 ) to the path where they are installed.
32333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32334 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32335 ies, typical locations are
32341 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32345 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32349 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32352 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32358 LibreOffice-<Version>
32365 On the Mac, the default location is
32367 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
32368 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32369 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
32370 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
32371 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32372 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32380 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32381 during the \SpecialChar LyX
32382 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32387 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
32388 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32392 \begin_layout Itemize
32393 \begin_inset Flex URL
32396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32398 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32406 \begin_layout Standard
32407 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32408 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32411 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32412 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32414 \begin_inset space ~
32419 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32421 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32422 and point \SpecialChar LyX
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32427 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32429 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32432 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32438 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32441 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
32442 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32451 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32452 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32454 \begin_inset space ~
32459 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32462 \begin_layout Subsection
32463 Using the thesaurus
32466 \begin_layout Standard
32467 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32469 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32472 or the toolbar button
32475 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32478 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32480 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32482 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32483 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32484 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32493 ), related terms (such as
32496 \begin_inset space ~
32505 ), compounds (such as
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32517 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32526 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32529 \begin_layout Standard
32530 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32531 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32535 \begin_layout Standard
32536 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32537 the dictionary, such as the above
32541 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32546 \begin_inset space \space{}
32549 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32550 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32551 For example, looking up the word form
32555 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32560 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32565 \begin_inset space \space{}
32576 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32577 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32578 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32581 \begin_layout Section
32583 \begin_inset Index idx
32586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32595 \begin_inset Index idx
32598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32601 Document ! Change Tracking
32607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32609 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32616 \begin_layout Standard
32617 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32618 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32619 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32620 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32624 \begin_inset space ~
32627 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32629 \begin_inset space ~
32637 \begin_layout Standard
32638 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32652 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32653 You can change the color in
32655 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32656 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32658 \begin_inset space ~
32662 \begin_inset space ~
32667 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32673 \begin_inset Index idx
32676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32679 Color ! Change tracking
32684 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
32685 's status bar when the
32686 cursor is in changed text.
32687 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32690 arg "changes-merge"
32696 \begin_layout Standard
32697 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
32699 \begin_inset Index idx
32702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32713 \begin_layout Standard
32714 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32720 \begin_layout Standard
32721 \begin_inset Graphics
32722 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32731 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32737 \begin_layout Standard
32738 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32741 \begin_layout Standard
32742 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32748 \begin_layout Standard
32749 \begin_inset Tabular
32750 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32751 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32752 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32753 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32763 arg "changes-track"
32771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32779 \begin_inset space ~
32782 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32784 \begin_inset space ~
32793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32802 arg "changes-output"
32810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32818 \begin_inset space ~
32821 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32823 \begin_inset space ~
32827 \begin_inset space ~
32831 \begin_inset space ~
32840 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32861 Jumps to the next change
32867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32876 arg "change-accept"
32884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32892 \begin_inset space ~
32895 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32897 \begin_inset space ~
32906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32915 arg "change-reject"
32923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32931 \begin_inset space ~
32934 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32936 \begin_inset space ~
32945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32954 arg "changes-merge"
32962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32970 \begin_inset space ~
32973 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32975 \begin_inset space ~
32984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32993 arg "all-changes-accept"
33001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33009 \begin_inset space ~
33012 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33014 \begin_inset space ~
33018 \begin_inset space ~
33027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33036 arg "all-changes-reject"
33044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33052 \begin_inset space ~
33055 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33057 \begin_inset space ~
33061 \begin_inset space ~
33070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33094 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33096 \begin_inset space ~
33105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33128 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33130 \begin_inset space ~
33146 \begin_layout Standard
33147 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33153 \begin_layout Standard
33154 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33174 \begin_layout Standard
33175 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33176 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33177 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33178 the next change after the current cursor position.
33179 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33180 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33181 step to the next change.
33182 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33185 \begin_layout Standard
33186 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33187 to describe a change.
33190 \begin_layout Standard
33191 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33197 \begin_inset Index idx
33200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33204 -packages ! dvipost
33210 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33212 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33218 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33222 \begin_layout Section
33223 Comparison of Documents
33224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33226 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33231 \begin_inset Index idx
33234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33237 Comparison of documents
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33246 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33249 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33253 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33254 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33256 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33258 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33262 \begin_inset space ~
33266 \begin_inset space ~
33270 \begin_inset space ~
33279 \begin_inset space ~
33283 \begin_inset space ~
33287 \begin_inset space ~
33291 \begin_inset space ~
33295 \begin_inset space ~
33299 \begin_inset space ~
33304 enables the change tracking option
33307 \begin_inset space ~
33311 \begin_inset space ~
33315 \begin_inset space ~
33320 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33323 \begin_layout Section
33324 International Support
33325 \begin_inset Index idx
33328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33331 International support
33339 \begin_layout Standard
33340 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
33341 with any language you want.
33342 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33343 up \SpecialChar LyX
33345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33347 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33354 \begin_layout Standard
33355 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
33356 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33357 \begin_inset space ~
33361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33363 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
33370 \begin_layout Subsection
33372 \begin_inset Index idx
33375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33384 \begin_inset Index idx
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33390 Document ! Settings
33396 \begin_inset Index idx
33399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33402 Document ! Language
33410 \begin_layout Standard
33413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33414 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33417 dialog lets you set the language, the quote style and character encoding.
33420 \begin_layout Standard
33425 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
33430 \begin_inset space ~
33435 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33436 For details about the different encoding options see section
33437 \begin_inset space ~
33441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33443 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33450 \begin_layout Subsection
33451 Keyboard mapping configuration
33452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33454 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
33461 \begin_layout Standard
33462 If you have for example a U.
33463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33466 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33467 can use an alternate keymap.
33468 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
33473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33475 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
33478 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33485 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
33490 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33491 which one you want to use.
33494 \begin_layout Standard
33495 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33496 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33497 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33501 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33502 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33503 one to support the characters you want.
33504 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33511 \begin_layout Chapter
33514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33516 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33525 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33526 topic inside the user's guide.
33529 \begin_layout Section
33531 \begin_inset Index idx
33534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33550 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33553 \begin_layout Subsection
33557 \begin_layout Standard
33558 Creates a new document.
33561 \begin_layout Subsection
33565 \begin_layout Standard
33566 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33567 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33568 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33571 \begin_layout Subsection
33575 \begin_layout Standard
33579 \begin_layout Subsection
33583 \begin_layout Standard
33584 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33585 Click there on a file to open it.
33588 \begin_layout Subsection
33592 \begin_layout Standard
33593 Closes the current document.
33596 \begin_layout Subsection
33600 \begin_layout Standard
33601 Closes all opened documents.
33604 \begin_layout Subsection
33608 \begin_layout Standard
33609 Saves the actual document.
33612 \begin_layout Subsection
33616 \begin_layout Standard
33617 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33620 \begin_layout Subsection
33624 \begin_layout Standard
33625 Saves all opened documents.
33628 \begin_layout Subsection
33632 \begin_layout Standard
33633 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33636 \begin_layout Subsection
33640 \begin_layout Standard
33641 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33642 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33643 It is described in the section
33645 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
33650 Additional Features
33655 \begin_layout Subsection
33659 \begin_layout Standard
33660 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
33661 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
33663 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
33664 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
33668 \begin_layout Standard
33669 When using the menu entry
33672 \begin_inset space ~
33677 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33681 \begin_inset space ~
33685 \begin_inset space ~
33689 \begin_inset space ~
33694 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33695 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33698 \begin_layout Subsection
33700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33702 name "subsec:Export"
33709 \begin_layout Standard
33710 You can export your document to various file formats.
33711 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
33713 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33714 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
33715 during its configuration.
33718 \begin_layout Standard
33719 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33721 \begin_inset space ~
33725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33727 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
33734 \begin_layout Description
33736 \begin_inset space ~
33739 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
33741 \begin_inset space ~
33744 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33745 \begin_inset Newline newline
33748 Since \SpecialChar LyX
33749 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
33753 \begin_layout Description
33754 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33760 \begin_layout Description
33762 \begin_inset space ~
33765 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33771 \begin_layout Description
33772 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
33773 's native DVI-format.
33774 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33775 files paths or file names in your document.
33777 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33784 \begin_layout Description
33785 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33786 in files paths or file names
33789 \begin_layout Description
33791 \begin_inset space ~
33794 (LuaTeX) DVI-format using the program
33796 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33799 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
33803 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33811 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33819 \begin_layout Description
33821 \begin_inset space ~
33824 (cropped) the same as
33828 but with cropped page margins.
33831 \begin_layout Description
33833 \begin_inset space ~
33836 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33840 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33845 \begin_layout Description
33849 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33857 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
33865 \begin_layout Description
33867 \begin_inset space ~
33871 \begin_inset space ~
33874 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33878 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33886 \begin_layout Description
33888 \begin_inset space ~
33891 (LuaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33892 source that is compilable with the program
33895 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33899 \begin_layout Description
33901 \begin_inset space ~
33904 (pdflatex) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33905 source, additionally all images used in the
33906 document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33910 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33913 \begin_layout Description
33915 \begin_inset space ~
33918 (plain) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33919 source code, additionally all images used in
33920 the document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33928 \begin_layout Description
33930 \begin_inset space ~
33933 (XeTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33934 source that is compilable with the program
33940 \begin_layout Description
33942 \begin_inset space ~
33946 \begin_inset space ~
33949 (LaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33950 source and also code in the syntax of the music
33956 \begin_layout Description
33958 \begin_inset space ~
33961 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
33962 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
33964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33968 \begin_inset space \space{}
33973 \begin_inset space ~
33977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33992 represent the version number)
33995 \begin_layout Description
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34004 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34005 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34006 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34010 \begin_layout Description
34011 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34012 's internal XHTML engine
34015 \begin_layout Description
34016 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34021 \begin_layout Description
34022 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34024 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34027 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34031 \begin_layout Description
34033 \begin_inset space ~
34036 (cropped) the same as
34039 \begin_inset space ~
34044 but with cropped page margins
34047 \begin_layout Description
34049 \begin_inset space ~
34052 (dvipdfm) PDF-format using the program
34056 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34059 \begin_layout Description
34061 \begin_inset space ~
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34068 resolution) the same as
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34076 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34081 \begin_inset space \space{}
34084 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34088 \begin_layout Description
34090 \begin_inset space ~
34093 (LuaTeX) PDF-format using the program
34095 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34098 , produces PDF-files directly
34101 \begin_layout Description
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34106 (pdflatex) PDF-format using the program
34110 , produces PDF-files directly
34113 \begin_layout Description
34115 \begin_inset space ~
34118 (ps2pdf) PDF-format using the program
34122 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34125 \begin_layout Description
34127 \begin_inset space ~
34130 (XeTeX) PDF-format using the program
34135 , produces PDF-files directly
34138 \begin_layout Description
34140 \begin_inset space ~
34146 \begin_layout Description
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset space ~
34155 (ps2ascii) text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript
34156 format and then exported as text using the program
34161 \begin_layout Description
34162 Postscript PostScript format using the program
34167 \begin_layout Description
34168 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34169 source and also code in the statistical programming
34183 it is possible to use
34187 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34191 \begin_layout Standard
34192 If one of the menu entries
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34208 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34210 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34212 \begin_inset space ~
34216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34218 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34223 \begin_inset Index idx
34226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34229 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
34238 \begin_layout Subsection
34242 \begin_layout Standard
34243 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34244 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
34247 \begin_inset space ~
34251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34253 reference "sec:Paths"
34258 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34267 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34268 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
34269 's preferences as described in section
34270 \begin_inset space ~
34274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34276 reference "subsec:Converters"
34283 \begin_layout Subsection
34284 New and Close Window
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
34292 \begin_layout Subsection
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34300 \begin_layout Section
34302 \begin_inset Index idx
34305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34316 \begin_layout Subsection
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34321 Described in section
34322 \begin_inset space ~
34326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34328 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34335 \begin_layout Subsection
34336 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34340 Described in section
34341 \begin_inset space ~
34345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34347 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34354 \begin_layout Subsection
34358 \begin_layout Standard
34359 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34360 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34363 \begin_layout Subsection
34367 \begin_layout Standard
34368 Selects the whole document.
34371 \begin_layout Subsection
34372 Find & Replace (Quick)
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34376 Described in section
34377 \begin_inset space ~
34381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34383 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34390 \begin_layout Subsection
34391 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 Described in section
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34402 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34409 \begin_layout Subsection
34410 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34413 \begin_layout Standard
34414 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34418 \begin_layout Subsection
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 Described in section
34424 \begin_inset space ~
34428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34430 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34437 \begin_layout Subsection
34439 \begin_inset Index idx
34442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34445 Paragraph ! Settings
34453 \begin_layout Standard
34454 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34455 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34461 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34468 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34470 \begin_inset space ~
34478 \begin_layout Subsection
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34483 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34484 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34485 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34489 \begin_layout Standard
34490 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34492 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34493 The properties of tables are described in section
34494 \begin_inset space ~
34498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34500 reference "sec:Tables"
34504 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34505 \begin_inset space ~
34509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34511 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34518 \begin_layout Subsection
34519 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34522 \begin_layout Standard
34523 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
34525 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34526 \begin_inset space ~
34530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34532 reference "sec:Nesting"
34537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34539 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34546 \begin_layout Subsection
34547 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
34550 \begin_layout Standard
34551 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
34552 nts of the same type.
34554 \begin_inset space ~
34558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34560 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
34564 for an explanation.
34567 \begin_layout Section
34569 \begin_inset Index idx
34572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 At the bottom of the
34588 menu the opened documents are listed.
34591 \begin_layout Subsection
34592 Open/Close all Insets
34595 \begin_layout Standard
34596 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34599 \begin_layout Subsection
34600 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34607 \begin_layout Standard
34608 Math macros are described in the
34615 \begin_layout Subsection
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 Shows the outline window as described in sections
34621 \begin_inset space ~
34625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34627 reference "sec:Navigating"
34632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34634 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34641 \begin_layout Subsection
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34648 \begin_inset space ~
34652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34654 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34661 \begin_layout Subsection
34665 \begin_layout Standard
34666 Opens a window showing console messages.
34667 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
34669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34672 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34673 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
34674 is processing the document.
34677 \begin_layout Subsection
34679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34681 name "subsec:Toolbars"
34686 \begin_inset Index idx
34689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34700 \begin_layout Standard
34701 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34702 All toolbars and the
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34710 can be turned on and off.
34715 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34727 \begin_inset space ~
34739 \begin_inset space ~
34744 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
34748 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
34755 \begin_layout Standard
34760 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
34764 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34765 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34766 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34767 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34768 is inside a formula or table respectively.
34771 \begin_layout Standard
34773 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34774 \begin_inset space ~
34778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34780 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34787 \begin_layout Subsection
34791 \begin_layout Standard
34795 \begin_inset space ~
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34803 \begin_inset space ~
34807 \begin_inset space ~
34811 \begin_inset space ~
34815 \begin_inset space ~
34820 will split \SpecialChar LyX
34821 's main window vertically while
34824 \begin_inset space ~
34828 \begin_inset space ~
34832 \begin_inset space ~
34836 \begin_inset space ~
34840 \begin_inset space ~
34844 \begin_inset space ~
34849 will split it horizontally.
34850 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34851 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34852 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
34853 three or more documents at the same time.
34854 To close a split view, use the menu
34857 \begin_inset space ~
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34869 \begin_layout Subsection
34873 \begin_layout Standard
34874 Closes a split view.
34877 \begin_layout Subsection
34881 \begin_layout Standard
34882 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34883 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34884 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
34885 's main window fullscreen.
34886 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34887 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34890 \begin_layout Section
34892 \begin_inset Index idx
34895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34906 \begin_layout Subsection
34910 \begin_layout Standard
34911 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34912 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34918 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34929 \begin_layout Subsection
34931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34933 name "subsec:Special-Character"
34940 \begin_layout Standard
34941 Here you can insert the following characters:
34944 \begin_layout Description
34949 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
34952 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
34953 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34954 -packages you have installed.
34955 You can get a complete display by checking
34958 \begin_inset space ~
34964 \begin_inset Newline newline
34968 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34976 Not all characters will be visible in the
34980 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
34982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34988 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
34992 ) can display every character.
35000 \begin_layout Description
35001 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35005 \begin_layout Description
35007 \begin_inset space ~
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35014 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35021 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35028 \begin_layout Description
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35033 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35043 \begin_layout Description
35045 \begin_inset space ~
35048 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35052 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35058 \begin_layout Description
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35063 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35067 \begin_layout Description
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35072 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35076 \begin_layout Description
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35081 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35087 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35093 \begin_layout Description
35095 \begin_inset space ~
35098 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35102 \begin_layout Description
35104 \begin_inset space ~
35108 \begin_inset Index idx
35111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35120 \begin_inset Index idx
35123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35126 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35131 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35132 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35134 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35140 \begin_inset Index idx
35143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35153 \begin_inset Newline newline
35156 More information about this feature can be found in the
35162 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35168 \begin_layout Subsection
35172 \begin_layout Standard
35173 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35176 \begin_layout Description
35177 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35178 \begin_inset script superscript
35180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35191 \begin_layout Description
35192 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35193 \begin_inset script subscript
35195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35206 \begin_layout Description
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35211 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35212 \begin_inset space ~
35216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35218 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35225 \begin_layout Description
35227 \begin_inset space ~
35230 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35231 \begin_inset space ~
35235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35237 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
35244 \begin_layout Description
35246 \begin_inset space ~
35249 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35250 \begin_inset space ~
35254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35256 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
35263 \begin_layout Description
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35268 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35274 \begin_inset space \space{}
35277 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35278 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
35284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35287 To insert a fraction use the command
35292 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35296 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35305 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35312 \begin_layout Description
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35317 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35318 \begin_inset space ~
35322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35324 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
35331 \begin_layout Description
35333 \begin_inset space ~
35336 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35337 \begin_inset space ~
35341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35343 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
35350 \begin_layout Description
35352 \begin_inset space ~
35355 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35362 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
35369 \begin_layout Description
35370 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35371 \begin_inset space ~
35375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35377 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
35384 \begin_layout Description
35386 \begin_inset space ~
35389 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35396 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
35403 \begin_layout Description
35405 \begin_inset space ~
35408 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35409 \begin_inset space ~
35413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35415 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
35422 \begin_layout Description
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35428 \begin_inset space ~
35431 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35432 \begin_inset space ~
35436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35438 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35445 \begin_layout Description
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35450 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35451 as described in section
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35458 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35465 \begin_layout Description
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35470 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35477 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35484 \begin_layout Description
35486 \begin_inset space ~
35489 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35490 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35492 \begin_inset space ~
35496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35498 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35505 \begin_layout Description
35507 \begin_inset space ~
35510 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35511 \begin_inset space ~
35515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35517 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35524 \begin_layout Description
35526 \begin_inset space ~
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35533 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35534 \begin_inset space ~
35538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35540 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35547 \begin_layout Subsection
35551 \begin_layout Standard
35552 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35556 \begin_inset space ~
35577 are described in section
35578 \begin_inset space ~
35582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35584 reference "sec:toc"
35593 is described in section
35594 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35600 reference "sec:Index"
35608 is described in section
35609 \begin_inset space ~
35613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35615 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35621 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35624 is described in section
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35631 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35638 \begin_layout Subsection
35642 \begin_layout Standard
35643 To insert floats, as described in section
35644 \begin_inset space ~
35648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35650 reference "sec:Floats"
35654 and in detail the chapter
35661 \begin_inset space ~
35669 \begin_layout Subsection
35673 \begin_layout Standard
35674 To insert notes, described in section
35675 \begin_inset space ~
35679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35681 reference "sec:Notes"
35688 \begin_layout Subsection
35692 \begin_layout Standard
35693 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
35695 Branches are described in section
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35702 reference "sec:Branches"
35709 \begin_layout Subsection
35713 \begin_layout Standard
35714 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35715 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35717 An example is the document class
35718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35725 with three custom insets.
35728 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35732 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
35738 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35741 \begin_layout Subsection
35743 \begin_inset Index idx
35746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35757 \begin_layout Standard
35758 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35760 For more information see chapter
35762 External Document Parts
35765 \begin_inset space ~
35771 \begin_layout Subsection
35773 \begin_inset Index idx
35776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35787 \begin_layout Standard
35788 Inserts a box in a certain style.
35789 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35804 \begin_layout Subsection
35808 \begin_layout Standard
35813 dialog as described in section
35814 \begin_inset space ~
35818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35820 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35827 \begin_layout Subsection
35831 \begin_layout Standard
35836 as described in section
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35843 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35850 \begin_layout Subsection
35854 \begin_layout Standard
35859 as described in section
35860 \begin_inset space ~
35864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35866 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35873 \begin_layout Subsection
35875 \begin_inset Index idx
35878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35887 \begin_inset Index idx
35890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35893 Longtables ! Caption
35901 \begin_layout Standard
35902 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35903 Floats are described in section
35904 \begin_inset space ~
35908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35910 reference "sec:Floats"
35914 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_layout Subsection
35933 \begin_layout Standard
35934 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35941 reference "sec:Index"
35948 \begin_layout Subsection
35952 \begin_layout Standard
35953 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35960 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35967 \begin_layout Subsection
35971 \begin_layout Standard
35972 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
35973 Tables are described in section
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35980 reference "sec:Tables"
35984 and in detail in the chapter
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35999 \begin_layout Subsection
36003 \begin_layout Standard
36009 Graphics are described in section
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36016 reference "sec:Graphics"
36023 \begin_layout Subsection
36027 \begin_layout Standard
36028 Inserts a URL as described in section
36029 \begin_inset space ~
36033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36035 reference "subsec:URLs"
36042 \begin_layout Subsection
36046 \begin_layout Standard
36047 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36048 \begin_inset space ~
36052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36054 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36061 \begin_layout Subsection
36065 \begin_layout Standard
36066 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36073 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36080 \begin_layout Subsection
36084 \begin_layout Standard
36085 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36086 \begin_inset space ~
36090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36092 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36099 \begin_layout Subsection
36103 \begin_layout Standard
36104 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36105 title or caption of a float.
36106 Inserts a short title as described in section
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36113 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36120 \begin_layout Subsection
36125 \begin_layout Standard
36126 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36127 Code box as described in section
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36134 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36141 \begin_layout Subsection
36143 \begin_inset Index idx
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36157 \begin_layout Standard
36158 Inserts a program listings box.
36159 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36161 Program Code Listings
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36174 \begin_layout Subsection
36178 \begin_layout Standard
36179 Inserts the actual date.
36180 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36184 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36192 \begin_inset space ~
36200 \begin_layout Subsection
36204 \begin_layout Standard
36205 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36212 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36219 \begin_layout Section
36221 \begin_inset Index idx
36224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 \begin_layout Standard
36236 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36237 \begin_inset space ~
36240 of the current document.
36241 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36244 \begin_layout Subsection
36248 \begin_layout Standard
36249 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36250 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36251 to jump, for example, between section
36252 \begin_inset space ~
36256 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36260 2.5 and use the submenu
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36267 \begin_inset space ~
36274 \begin_inset space ~
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36290 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36294 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36300 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36303 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36306 \begin_layout Standard
36307 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36311 \begin_inset space ~
36316 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36324 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36327 \begin_layout Subsection
36328 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36332 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36336 \begin_layout Subsection
36340 \begin_layout Standard
36341 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36342 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36343 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36347 \begin_inset space ~
36351 \begin_inset space ~
36359 \begin_layout Subsection
36363 \begin_layout Standard
36364 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36367 The \SpecialChar LyX
36368 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
36370 \begin_inset space ~
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36383 manual for a detailed description.
36386 \begin_layout Section
36388 \begin_inset Index idx
36391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36402 \begin_layout Subsection
36406 \begin_layout Standard
36407 Change Tracking is described in section
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36414 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36421 \begin_layout Subsection
36425 \begin_layout Standard
36426 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
36427 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
36428 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36430 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36431 to the clipboard or update the view.
36432 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36436 \begin_layout Subsection
36437 Start Appendix Here
36440 \begin_layout Standard
36441 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36442 as described in section
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36449 reference "sec:Appendices"
36456 \begin_layout Subsection
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36464 \begin_layout Standard
36465 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36466 default output format for the document (menu
36468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36469 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36470 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset space ~
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36488 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36492 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
36495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36496 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36501 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36506 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36524 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36528 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36529 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36531 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36532 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36537 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36539 \begin_inset space ~
36542 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36552 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36557 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36558 when it is first configured.
36559 The default output format is
36562 \begin_inset space ~
36570 \begin_layout Subsection
36571 View (Other Formats)
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36575 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36576 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36577 actual document with an external program.
36578 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36579 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36580 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
36582 All possible formats are listed in section
36583 \begin_inset space ~
36587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36589 reference "subsec:Export"
36594 You should at least see the menu entry
36599 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36601 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36609 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36614 \begin_inset Index idx
36617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36620 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36629 \begin_layout Standard
36630 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36631 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36633 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36634 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36639 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36644 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36654 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36659 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36660 when it is first configured.
36663 \begin_layout Subsection
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36671 \begin_layout Standard
36672 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
36673 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
36676 \begin_layout Subsection
36677 Update (Other Formats)
36680 \begin_layout Standard
36681 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
36682 your document without opening a new viewer window.
36685 \begin_layout Subsection
36686 View Master Document
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36690 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36711 manual for more information on this topic).
36712 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
36713 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36726 generates the output of the whole book, while
36730 will just output the chapter alone.
36733 \begin_layout Standard
36734 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36735 in the document settings (menu
36737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36738 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36739 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36745 \begin_inset space ~
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36757 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36761 ) or in the preferences (menu
36763 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36764 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36769 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36771 \begin_inset space ~
36774 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36776 \begin_inset space ~
36780 \begin_inset space ~
36786 \begin_inset space ~
36790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36792 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36799 \begin_layout Subsection
36800 Update Master Document
36803 \begin_layout Standard
36804 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36820 \begin_inset space ~
36825 manual for more information on this topic).
36826 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
36827 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
36830 \begin_layout Standard
36831 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36832 in the document settings (menu
36834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36835 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36836 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36838 \begin_inset space ~
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36854 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36858 ) or in the preferences (menu
36860 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36861 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36866 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36871 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36873 \begin_inset space ~
36877 \begin_inset space ~
36883 \begin_inset space ~
36887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36889 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36896 \begin_layout Subsection
36898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36900 name "subsec:Compressed"
36907 \begin_layout Standard
36908 Un/compresses the current document.
36909 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
36910 compression (see the
36912 Additional Features
36914 manual for details).
36917 \begin_layout Subsection
36921 \begin_layout Standard
36922 The document settings are described in appendix
36923 \begin_inset space ~
36927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36929 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36936 \begin_layout Section
36938 \begin_inset Index idx
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36952 \begin_layout Subsection
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36957 Spell checking is explained in section
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36964 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
36971 \begin_layout Subsection
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36976 The thesaurus is described in section
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36992 \begin_inset Index idx
36995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37004 \begin_inset Index idx
37007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37018 \begin_layout Standard
37019 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37020 the highlighted document part.
37023 \begin_layout Subsection
37025 \begin_inset Index idx
37028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37031 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 Generates with the help of the program
37043 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37046 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37047 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37048 This feature is not available on Windows.
37051 \begin_layout Subsection
37053 \begin_inset Index idx
37056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37068 \begin_layout Standard
37069 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37079 to see the full filename paths.
37082 \begin_layout Subsection
37084 \begin_inset Index idx
37087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37100 files as described in section
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37107 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37114 \begin_layout Subsection
37116 \begin_inset Index idx
37119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37134 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37152 \begin_inset Index idx
37155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37158 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37167 \begin_layout Standard
37168 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37169 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37170 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37171 -packages and programs it needs; see
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37179 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37186 \begin_layout Subsection
37190 \begin_layout Standard
37195 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37196 \begin_inset space ~
37200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37202 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37209 \begin_layout Section
37211 \begin_inset Index idx
37214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37225 \begin_layout Standard
37226 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37227 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37229 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37233 \begin_layout Standard
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37243 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37244 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37245 packages and classes found
37246 by \SpecialChar LyX
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37254 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37261 \begin_layout Standard
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37270 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
37275 \begin_layout Section
37277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37279 name "sec:Toolbars"
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37294 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
37301 \begin_layout Standard
37302 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37303 This is described in the
37305 Additional Features
37310 \begin_layout Subsection
37312 \begin_inset Index idx
37315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37326 \begin_layout Standard
37327 \begin_inset Graphics
37328 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37336 \begin_layout Standard
37337 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37343 \begin_layout Standard
37344 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37361 \begin_inset Note Note
37364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37367 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37372 manual for more information.
37380 \begin_layout Standard
37381 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37388 \begin_inset Tabular
37389 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37390 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37391 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37392 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37398 \begin_inset Graphics
37399 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37413 pull-down box for the environments
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37433 \begin_layout Standard
37435 \begin_inset Tabular
37436 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37437 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37438 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37439 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37463 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37493 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37523 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37539 arg "dialog-show print"
37547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37553 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37569 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37583 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37643 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37703 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37733 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37749 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37763 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37782 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37789 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37803 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37831 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37845 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37846 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
37853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37874 Emphasize text, function of the
37876 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37878 \begin_inset space ~
37881 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37911 Set text to noun style, function of the
37913 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37918 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37936 arg "textstyle-apply"
37944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37948 Format text using the current settings in the
37950 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37955 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37988 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
37990 \begin_inset space ~
37999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38022 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38036 arg "tabular-insert"
38044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38066 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38078 Toggle outline window on/off,
38080 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38096 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38108 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38123 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38135 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38148 \begin_layout Subsection
38150 \begin_inset Index idx
38153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38164 \begin_layout Standard
38165 \begin_inset Graphics
38166 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38186 \begin_layout Standard
38187 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38193 \begin_layout Standard
38194 \begin_inset Tabular
38195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38196 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38197 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38235 arg "layout Enumerate"
38243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38262 arg "layout Itemize"
38270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38316 arg "layout Description"
38324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 arg "depth-increment"
38351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38357 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38359 \begin_inset space ~
38363 \begin_inset space ~
38372 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38381 arg "depth-decrement"
38389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38395 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38397 \begin_inset space ~
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38419 arg "float-insert figure"
38427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38434 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38450 arg "float-insert table"
38458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38465 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38511 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38541 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 arg "nomencl-insert"
38613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38621 \begin_inset space ~
38630 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38639 arg "footnote-insert"
38647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38653 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38669 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38685 \begin_inset space ~
38694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38717 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38718 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38729 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38738 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38759 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38814 \begin_inset space ~
38823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38847 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38863 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38878 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38880 \begin_inset space ~
38889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38898 arg "dialog-show character"
38906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38912 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38914 \begin_inset space ~
38917 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 arg "layout-paragraph"
38941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38947 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38949 \begin_inset space ~
38958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38967 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38995 \begin_layout Subsection
38996 View/Update Toolbar
38997 \begin_inset Index idx
39000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39003 Toolbar ! View / Update
39011 \begin_layout Standard
39012 \begin_inset Graphics
39013 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39020 \begin_layout Standard
39021 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39027 \begin_layout Standard
39028 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39032 \begin_layout Standard
39033 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39039 \begin_layout Standard
39040 \begin_inset Tabular
39041 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39042 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39043 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39044 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39068 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39075 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 arg "buffer-update"
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 arg "master-buffer-view"
39122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39148 arg "master-buffer-update"
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39164 \begin_inset space ~
39168 \begin_inset space ~
39177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39201 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39202 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39203 Synchronize with Output
39209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 \begin_inset Graphics
39215 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
39217 groupId toolbarbuttons
39228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39235 View (Other Formats)
39241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39246 \begin_inset Graphics
39247 filename ../../images/update-others.svgz
39249 groupId toolbarbuttons
39258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39264 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39265 Update (Other Formats)
39278 \begin_layout Standard
39279 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39283 \begin_layout Subsection
39287 \begin_layout Standard
39288 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39295 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39299 , the table toolbar
39300 \begin_inset Index idx
39303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39314 \begin_inset space ~
39319 manual and the math macro toolbar
39320 \begin_inset Index idx
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39338 \begin_layout Chapter
39339 The Document Settings
39340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39342 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39347 \begin_inset Index idx
39350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 Document ! Settings
39361 \begin_layout Standard
39365 \begin_inset space ~
39370 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39371 is called with the menu
39373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39377 You can save your document settings as default with the
39379 Save as Document Defaults
39381 button in any dialog.
39382 This will create a template named
39386 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
39387 when you create a new document without
39391 \begin_layout Standard
39396 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39397 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39402 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39403 to find the one you are looking for.
39404 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39405 the submenus of the dialog.
39407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39411 \begin_inset space \space{}
39415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39422 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39423 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39424 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39427 \begin_layout Section
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39434 Document classes are described in section
39435 \begin_inset space ~
39439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39441 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39449 \begin_layout Standard
39453 \begin_inset space ~
39458 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
39463 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
39464 as a layout for a document class.
39465 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39467 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39476 \begin_layout Standard
39477 Some classes use special class options by default.
39478 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39482 and you can decide to use them or not.
39483 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39484 recommended you leave them untouched.
39489 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39490 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39495 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39497 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39503 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39504 \begin_inset Newline newline
39509 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39512 \begin_inset Newline newline
39515 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39516 distribution, see section
39521 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39523 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39535 \begin_layout Standard
39540 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39541 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
39542 in the background if the child document
39543 is opened without its master.
39544 This way child documents are always compilable.
39545 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39552 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_layout Standard
39561 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39572 \begin_inset Index idx
39575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39579 -packages ! prettyref
39585 \begin_inset Index idx
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 -packages ! refstyle
39597 for cross-references, see section
39598 \begin_inset space ~
39602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39604 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39611 \begin_layout Section
39615 \begin_layout Standard
39616 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39617 Please refer to the section
39620 \begin_inset space ~
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39633 manual for details.
39636 \begin_layout Section
39640 \begin_layout Standard
39641 Modules are explained in section
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39648 reference "subsec:Modules"
39655 \begin_layout Section
39659 \begin_layout Standard
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39667 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
39674 \begin_layout Section
39678 \begin_layout Standard
39679 The document font settings are described in section
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39686 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39693 \begin_layout Section
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39698 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39710 \begin_inset space ~
39715 and whether it should be a
39718 \begin_inset space ~
39723 can also be specified here.
39726 \begin_layout Standard
39727 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
39728 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
39729 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39731 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39734 \begin_layout Standard
39737 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
39740 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
39741 justifies the text on screen.
39742 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
39746 \begin_layout Section
39750 \begin_layout Standard
39751 This dialog is described in sections
39752 \begin_inset space ~
39756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39758 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39765 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
39772 \begin_layout Section
39776 \begin_layout Standard
39777 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39784 reference "subsec:Margins"
39791 \begin_layout Section
39793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39795 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39800 \begin_inset Index idx
39803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39806 Language ! Encoding
39814 \begin_layout Standard
39815 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39816 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
39817 (the \SpecialChar LyX
39819 is always encoded in utf8).
39820 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39821 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
39822 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39823 -command is not known for
39824 a particular character).
39827 \begin_layout Standard
39828 If you use the option
39833 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39834 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39835 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39837 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39838 exactly one encoding.
39839 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39842 \begin_layout Standard
39844 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39845 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39846 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39847 installation supports Unicode), choose
39848 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39849 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39850 is quite incomplete, so
39851 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39856 (when \SpecialChar LyX
39857 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39858 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
39859 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39860 -commands is not used, because all
39861 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39862 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
39863 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39864 , two new alternative engines
39865 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39867 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39869 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39872 \begin_inset space ~
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39900 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39905 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39909 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39912 \begin_layout Standard
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39921 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39922 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39932 The possible settings are:
39935 \begin_layout Description
39936 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39938 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39939 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39949 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
39956 \begin_layout Description
39957 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
39958 format you will use.
39959 In many cases this will be
39964 \begin_inset Index idx
39967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 If the newer package
39982 \begin_inset Index idx
39985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39989 -packages ! polyglossia
39994 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
39995 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39996 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
39998 this package will be used instead of
40005 \begin_layout Description
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40018 would be more appropriate.
40021 \begin_layout Description
40022 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40023 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40027 (for German texts), type in
40030 \begin_inset Newline newline
40035 usepackage{ngerman}
40038 \begin_layout Description
40039 None will not use a language package.
40040 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40043 \begin_layout Standard
40044 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40047 \begin_layout Description
40049 \begin_inset space ~
40053 \begin_inset space ~
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40064 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40070 \begin_inset Index idx
40073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 -packages ! inputenc
40083 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40084 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40085 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40089 \begin_layout Description
40090 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40092 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40093 commands, which may result in a big
40094 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40095 -commands are needed.
40098 \begin_layout Description
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40104 \begin_inset space ~
40107 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40110 \begin_layout Description
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40116 \begin_inset space ~
40119 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40122 \begin_layout Description
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40127 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40130 \begin_layout Description
40132 \begin_inset space ~
40136 \begin_inset space ~
40139 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40140 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40143 \begin_layout Description
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40149 \begin_inset space ~
40152 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40156 \begin_layout Description
40158 \begin_inset space ~
40162 \begin_inset space ~
40165 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40166 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40169 \begin_layout Description
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40175 \begin_inset space ~
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40182 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40189 \begin_layout Description
40191 \begin_inset space ~
40195 \begin_inset space ~
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40202 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40203 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40206 \begin_layout Description
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40215 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40216 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40217 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40218 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40219 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40229 \begin_layout Description
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40235 \begin_inset space ~
40238 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40239 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40240 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40242 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40247 \begin_inset space ~
40253 \begin_layout Description
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset space ~
40262 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40265 \begin_layout Description
40267 \begin_inset space ~
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40274 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40277 \begin_layout Description
40279 \begin_inset space ~
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40286 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40289 \begin_layout Description
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40294 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40297 \begin_layout Description
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40302 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40305 \begin_layout Description
40307 \begin_inset space ~
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40314 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40317 \begin_layout Description
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40329 \begin_layout Description
40331 \begin_inset space ~
40335 \begin_inset space ~
40338 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40341 \begin_layout Description
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40347 \begin_inset space ~
40353 \begin_layout Description
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_inset space ~
40362 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40368 \begin_inset Index idx
40371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40380 , when using this, set the document language to
40385 \begin_layout Description
40387 \begin_inset space ~
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40394 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40399 , when using this, set the document language to
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40408 \begin_layout Description
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40417 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40423 \begin_inset Index idx
40426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40430 -packages ! japanese
40435 , when using this, set the document language to
40440 \begin_layout Description
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40446 \begin_inset space ~
40449 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40454 , when using this, set the document language to
40459 \begin_layout Description
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_inset space ~
40468 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40473 , when using this, set the document language to
40478 \begin_layout Description
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40483 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40486 \begin_layout Description
40488 \begin_inset space ~
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset space ~
40499 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40502 \begin_layout Description
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40515 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40516 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40517 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40520 \begin_layout Description
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40532 \begin_layout Description
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40541 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40542 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40545 \begin_layout Description
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40551 \begin_inset space ~
40554 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40560 \begin_inset Index idx
40563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40572 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40575 \begin_layout Description
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_inset space ~
40584 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40591 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40594 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40601 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40602 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40604 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40607 \begin_layout Description
40609 \begin_inset space ~
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40616 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40622 \begin_inset Index idx
40625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40634 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40637 \begin_layout Description
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40642 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40648 \begin_inset Index idx
40651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40655 -packages ! inputenc
40661 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40665 \begin_layout Description
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40678 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_layout Description
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset space ~
40698 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40699 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40700 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40704 \begin_layout Description
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40717 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40718 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40721 \begin_layout Section
40723 \begin_inset Index idx
40726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40735 \begin_inset Index idx
40738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40747 \begin_inset Index idx
40750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40753 Color ! Shaded boxes
40759 \begin_inset Index idx
40762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40765 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40773 \begin_layout Standard
40774 Here you can alter the font color for the
40778 (default: black), for
40781 \begin_inset space ~
40786 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40790 (default: white) and for
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40803 sets the color back to the default.
40806 \begin_layout Standard
40807 Clicking any button showing
40815 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40816 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40817 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40818 later more quickly.
40821 \begin_layout Standard
40822 Note, if you change the
40825 \begin_inset space ~
40830 font color and use the option
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40838 in the document settings under
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40846 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40853 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40860 \begin_layout Standard
40861 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40867 \begin_layout Standard
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40880 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40886 Code after a forced page break:
40889 \begin_layout Itemize
40890 For the page color:
40891 \begin_inset Newline newline
40898 pagecolor{color name}
40901 \begin_layout Itemize
40902 For the text color:
40903 \begin_inset Newline newline
40913 \begin_layout Standard
40914 You are restricted to one of
40950 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40963 \begin_inset Newline newline
40966 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
40967 names to refer to them:
40970 \begin_layout Itemize
40976 \begin_inset Newline newline
40981 page_backgroundcolor
40984 \begin_layout Itemize
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40994 \begin_inset Newline newline
41002 \begin_layout Itemize
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41012 \begin_inset Newline newline
41020 \begin_layout Itemize
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41030 \begin_inset Newline newline
41038 \begin_layout Standard
41039 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41058 \begin_layout Section
41062 \begin_layout Standard
41063 Here you can adjust the
41067 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41071 as described in section
41072 \begin_inset space ~
41076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41078 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41085 \begin_layout Section
41089 \begin_layout Standard
41090 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41096 \begin_inset Index idx
41099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41113 \begin_inset Index idx
41116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 -packages ! jurabib
41128 Sectioned bibliography
41130 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41136 \begin_inset Index idx
41139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41143 -packages ! bibtopic
41148 and you can select a
41152 for the generation of the bibliography.
41153 For a further description see section
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41160 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41167 \begin_layout Section
41171 \begin_layout Standard
41172 Here you can define the
41176 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41178 \begin_inset space ~
41182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41184 reference "sec:Index"
41191 \begin_layout Section
41195 \begin_layout Standard
41196 The PDF properties are explained in section
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41203 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41210 \begin_layout Section
41214 \begin_layout Standard
41215 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41216 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41222 \begin_inset Index idx
41225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41229 -packages ! amsmath
41239 \begin_inset Index idx
41242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41246 -packages ! amssymb
41256 \begin_inset Index idx
41259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41273 \begin_inset Index idx
41276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41290 \begin_inset Index idx
41293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 -packages ! mathdots
41307 \begin_inset Index idx
41310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41314 -packages ! mathtools
41324 \begin_inset Index idx
41327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41341 \begin_inset Index idx
41344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41348 -packages ! stackrel
41358 \begin_inset Index idx
41361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41365 -packages ! stmaryrd
41375 \begin_inset Index idx
41378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41382 -packages ! undertilde
41387 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41390 \begin_layout Description
41391 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41392 -errors in formulas,
41393 ensure that you have this enabled.
41396 \begin_layout Description
41397 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
41398 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41399 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
41403 \begin_layout Description
41404 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41419 \begin_layout Description
41420 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41423 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_layout Description
41436 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41447 \begin_layout Description
41448 mathtools is used for the math commands
41484 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
41491 \begin_layout Description
41492 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41494 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41503 \begin_layout Description
41504 stackrel is used for the math command
41521 \begin_layout Description
41522 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
41525 \begin_layout Description
41526 undertilde is used for the math command
41534 Accents for one Character
41543 \begin_layout Section
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41548 The float placement options are described in the section
41551 \begin_inset space ~
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41567 \begin_layout Section
41571 \begin_layout Standard
41572 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41574 Program Code Listings
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41587 \begin_layout Section
41591 \begin_layout Standard
41592 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41600 set to be used and set the
41605 The itemize environment is described in section
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41612 reference "sec:Itemize"
41619 \begin_layout Standard
41620 You can furthermore specify a
41623 \begin_inset space ~
41628 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41629 command of the desired character.
41630 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41637 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41643 \begin_inset space \space{}
41647 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41657 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41658 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41661 \begin_layout Standard
41662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41670 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41671 -packages in the preamble (menu
41674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41675 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41678 \begin_inset space ~
41684 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41688 usepackage{textcomp}
41691 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41695 usepackage{amssymb}
41705 \begin_layout Section
41709 \begin_layout Standard
41710 Branches are described in section
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41717 reference "sec:Branches"
41724 \begin_layout Section
41726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41728 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41735 \begin_layout Standard
41736 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41739 \begin_layout Description
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41745 \begin_inset space ~
41748 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41768 View Master Document
41769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41776 Update Master Document
41777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41784 menu or the toolbar.
41785 The default is set in
41787 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41788 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41793 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41797 \begin_inset space ~
41801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41803 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41810 \begin_layout Description
41812 \begin_inset space ~
41816 \begin_inset space ~
41819 Output settings for the menu
41821 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41829 For a detailed description see section
41831 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41844 \begin_layout Description
41846 \begin_inset space ~
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41853 Options offers settings for the export format
41861 \begin_inset space ~
41866 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41867 \begin_inset space ~
41870 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41879 settings are described in detail in section
41881 Math Output in XHTML
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_inset space ~
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41904 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41907 \begin_layout Section
41911 \begin_layout Standard
41912 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41914 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
41916 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41918 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41922 \begin_layout Standard
41923 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41924 -syntax is given in section
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41931 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41938 \begin_layout Chapter
41939 The Preferences Dialog
41940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41942 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41947 \begin_inset Index idx
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41961 \begin_layout Standard
41962 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
41964 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41968 It has the following submenus.
41971 \begin_layout Section
41975 \begin_layout Subsection
41979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41980 User Interface File
41981 \begin_inset Index idx
41984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41987 Customization ! of toolbars
41993 \begin_inset Index idx
41996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41999 Customization ! of menus
42007 \begin_layout Standard
42008 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42009 interface (ui) file.
42010 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42018 \begin_layout Description
42023 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42026 \begin_layout Description
42033 the menu entries in popup context menus
42036 \begin_layout Description
42041 specifies the toolbar buttons
42044 \begin_layout Standard
42045 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42046 and edit the entries.
42049 \begin_layout Standard
42050 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42062 entries must be finished with an explicit
42087 and in the case of the
42088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42100 The syntax for the entries is:
42103 \begin_layout Standard
42104 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42133 \begin_layout Standard
42135 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42138 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42139 -functions are listed in the menu
42141 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42151 \begin_layout Standard
42152 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42158 \begin_layout Standard
42159 For example, assuming you use the menu
42161 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42164 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42168 \begin_layout Standard
42169 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42193 \begin_layout Standard
42195 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42210 to have the sixth bookmark.
42213 \begin_layout Standard
42217 \begin_inset space ~
42222 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42223 's toolbar buttons.
42224 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42228 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42239 \begin_layout Standard
42242 Enable tool tips in main work area
42244 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42252 \begin_layout Standard
42257 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42258 should display in the menu
42260 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42262 \begin_inset space ~
42270 \begin_layout Subsection
42274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42278 \begin_layout Standard
42281 Restore window layouts and geometries
42284 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42285 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42289 \begin_layout Standard
42292 Restore cursor positions
42294 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42298 \begin_layout Standard
42301 Load opened files from last session
42303 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42307 \begin_layout Standard
42310 Clear all session information
42312 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
42313 sessions (cursor positions, names
42314 of last opened documents, etc.).
42317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42321 name "subsec:Backup documents"
42326 \begin_inset Index idx
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42340 \begin_layout Standard
42343 Backup original documents when saving
42345 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42346 it was saved the last time.
42347 It is stored in the
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42356 \begin_inset space ~
42360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42362 reference "sec:Paths"
42366 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42369 \begin_inset space ~
42375 The backup file has the file extension
42376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42390 \begin_layout Standard
42393 Backup documents, every
42395 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42398 \begin_layout Standard
42401 Save documents compressed by default
42403 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
42404 \begin_inset space ~
42408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42410 reference "subsec:Compressed"
42415 This applies to newly created documents only.
42416 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
42419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42420 Windows & work area
42423 \begin_layout Standard
42426 Open documents in tabs
42428 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
42432 \begin_layout Standard
42437 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
42442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42450 reference "sec:Paths"
42454 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
42461 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
42462 documents will be opened in the same running instance
42463 of \SpecialChar LyX
42465 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
42466 instance is created for each file.
42469 \begin_layout Standard
42472 Single close-tab button
42474 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42477 \begin_inset Graphics
42478 filename ../../images/closetab.svgz
42485 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42486 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42490 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42498 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
42499 before the change takes effect.
42507 \begin_layout Standard
42512 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
42514 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
42516 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42520 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
42521 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
42522 and only want to close the view in once instance.
42525 \begin_layout Subsection
42527 \begin_inset Index idx
42530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42541 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42548 \begin_layout Standard
42549 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
42553 \begin_layout Standard
42554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 This section only deals with the fonts
42566 the \SpecialChar LyX
42568 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42572 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42583 \begin_layout Standard
42584 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
42601 (depends on the system) as its
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42620 \begin_layout Standard
42621 You can change the font size with the
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42633 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42638 points have the size of 1
42639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42649 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42654 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42659 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42660 \begin_inset space ~
42664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42666 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
42673 \begin_layout Standard
42676 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42678 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
42679 needs to redraw the screen less often.
42680 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42681 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42682 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42684 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42691 \begin_layout Subsection
42693 \begin_inset Index idx
42696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42699 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
42706 \begin_inset Index idx
42709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
42722 by choosing an item in the
42723 list and selecting the
42730 \begin_layout Standard
42731 By checking the option
42735 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42738 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42739 \begin_inset space ~
42743 \begin_inset space ~
42748 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42751 \begin_layout Subsection
42753 \begin_inset Index idx
42756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42767 \begin_layout Standard
42768 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
42772 \begin_layout Standard
42777 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42778 This feature is described in section
42779 \begin_inset space ~
42783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42785 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42793 Checking the option
42796 \begin_inset space ~
42800 \begin_inset space ~
42804 \begin_inset space ~
42809 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42812 \begin_layout Section
42814 \begin_inset Index idx
42817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42828 \begin_layout Subsection
42832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42836 \begin_layout Standard
42839 Cursor follows scrollbar
42841 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42845 \begin_layout Standard
42846 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42847 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42848 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42851 \begin_layout Standard
42854 Scroll below end of document
42856 is self-explanatory.
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42860 In \SpecialChar LyX
42861 one can jump from word to word by pressing
42868 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42870 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42871 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42874 \begin_layout Standard
42877 Sort environments alphabetically
42879 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42885 Group environments by their category
42887 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42895 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42906 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42916 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42917 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42921 \begin_layout Subsection
42923 \begin_inset Index idx
42926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42935 \begin_inset Index idx
42938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42941 Settings ! Shortcuts
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42954 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
42956 Several binding files are available, among them:
42959 \begin_layout Description
42960 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42963 \begin_layout Description
42964 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42976 \begin_layout Description
42977 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42988 \begin_layout Standard
42989 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
42994 , and binding files for special languages.
42995 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
42996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43000 \begin_inset space \space{}
43004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43012 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43013 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43014 will try to use the appropriate binding
43018 \begin_layout Standard
43019 Some binding files, like
43023 , only have a limited scope.
43024 When looking at the end of the file
43028 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43031 \begin_layout Standard
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43044 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43045 in the selected key binding file.
43048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43052 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43057 \begin_inset Index idx
43060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43063 Key Bindings ! Editing
43071 \begin_layout Standard
43072 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43073 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43074 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43075 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43078 Show key-bindings containing
43081 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43082 Insert there for example as keyword
43083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43090 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43091 functions that contain
43092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43100 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43101 All \SpecialChar LyX
43102 functions are also listed in the file
43107 that you will find in the
43114 \begin_layout Standard
43115 For example, to add the shortcut
43123 , select the function and press the
43128 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43129 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43132 \begin_layout Standard
43133 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43134 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43136 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43137 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43139 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43144 \begin_layout Standard
43145 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43149 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43151 The syntax of the entries is:
43154 \begin_layout Standard
43160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43179 \begin_layout Subsection
43181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43183 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43188 \begin_inset Index idx
43191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43200 \begin_inset Index idx
43203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43206 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43214 \begin_layout Standard
43215 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43216 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43217 provides keyboard maps.
43218 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43219 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43226 \begin_inset space ~
43231 and select the keyboard map file named
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43247 keyboard map and, if you use the
43251 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43254 arg "keymap-primary"
43260 arg "keymap-secondary"
43263 respectively or toggle between them with
43266 arg "keymap-toggle"
43272 \begin_layout Standard
43273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43281 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43290 \begin_layout Standard
43291 You can also specify the mouse
43293 Wheel scrolling speed
43296 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43300 \begin_layout Standard
43308 \begin_inset space ~
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43317 you can select a key for zooming.
43318 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43321 \begin_layout Subsection
43325 \begin_layout Standard
43326 Input completion is described in section
43327 \begin_inset space ~
43331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43333 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43340 \begin_layout Section
43342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43349 \begin_inset Index idx
43352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 \begin_inset Index idx
43364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43375 \begin_layout Standard
43376 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
43377 are normally determined during
43379 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43382 \begin_layout Description
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43387 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
43388 's working directory.
43389 It is the default when you
43400 \begin_inset space ~
43408 \begin_layout Description
43410 \begin_inset space ~
43413 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43415 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43417 \begin_inset space ~
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43429 \begin_layout Description
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43434 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43440 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43444 \begin_inset Newline newline
43448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43460 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
43461 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43469 \begin_layout Description
43471 \begin_inset space ~
43475 \begin_inset Index idx
43478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43486 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43487 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43494 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43502 will be used to save the backups.
43503 \begin_inset Newline newline
43506 Backup files have the ending
43507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43517 \begin_layout Description
43519 \begin_inset space ~
43522 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43523 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
43525 \begin_inset Newline newline
43532 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43538 You can edit this file with the program
43547 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
43548 in its preferences under
43551 \begin_inset space ~
43557 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43562 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
43564 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43565 in your \SpecialChar LyX
43571 and \SpecialChar LyX
43572 need to be running the same time.
43573 \begin_inset Newline newline
43576 The pipe is also used for the
43581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43587 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43592 \begin_inset Newline newline
43595 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
43596 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43597 \begin_inset Newline newline
43613 \begin_layout Description
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43618 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43621 \begin_layout Description
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43626 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43627 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43628 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43631 \begin_layout Description
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43636 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43642 You only need to specify it if you are using
43646 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43648 For \SpecialChar LyX
43653 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43657 \begin_layout Description
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43662 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43663 When \SpecialChar LyX
43664 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
43665 to find it on the system.
43666 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
43668 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43677 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43678 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43681 \begin_layout Description
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43686 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43687 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
43688 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
43689 code or in the document
43691 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43693 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43694 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43695 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43696 scanned for the input files.
43697 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43698 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
43700 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43701 compilation may fail for some documents.
43704 \begin_layout Section
43708 \begin_layout Standard
43709 Here you can insert your
43718 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43720 \begin_inset space ~
43724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43726 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43730 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43733 \begin_layout Section
43735 \begin_inset Index idx
43738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43741 Language ! Settings
43747 \begin_inset Index idx
43750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43753 Settings ! Language
43761 \begin_layout Subsection
43763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43765 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43772 \begin_layout Description
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43781 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
43783 You can find its actual translation status here:
43784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43786 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43793 \begin_layout Description
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43798 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
43799 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
43800 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43801 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43818 The most widespread language package is
43823 \begin_inset Index idx
43826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43835 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
43837 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43838 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43839 come with the alternative
43845 \begin_inset Index idx
43848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43852 -packages ! polyglossia
43857 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43858 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43864 The available selections are described in section
43865 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43871 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43878 \begin_layout Description
43880 \begin_inset space ~
43883 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43884 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
43885 you can here specify the command to start the package.
43886 An example is the start command
43892 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43894 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
43898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43913 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43918 \begin_layout Description
43920 \begin_inset space ~
43928 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43929 command toggles the package on and off.
43932 \begin_layout Description
43934 \begin_inset space ~
43938 \begin_inset space ~
43941 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43945 \begin_layout Description
43947 \begin_inset space ~
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43954 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
43958 \begin_layout Description
43960 \begin_inset space ~
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43967 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43968 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43969 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
43971 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43978 \begin_layout Description
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43983 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43985 When this option is not set, the
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43993 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43995 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43998 \begin_inset space ~
44006 \begin_layout Description
44008 \begin_inset space ~
44014 \begin_inset space ~
44020 When it is not set, the
44023 \begin_inset space ~
44028 is set to the end of the document.
44031 \begin_layout Description
44033 \begin_inset space ~
44037 \begin_inset space ~
44040 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44041 language will be underlined in blue.
44044 \begin_layout Description
44046 \begin_inset space ~
44050 \begin_inset space ~
44053 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44054 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44057 \begin_layout Description
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44062 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44063 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44064 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44065 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44068 \begin_layout Subsection
44072 \begin_layout Standard
44073 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44080 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44087 \begin_layout Section
44091 \begin_layout Subsection
44095 \begin_layout Description
44097 \begin_inset space ~
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44104 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44107 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44108 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44116 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44119 \begin_layout Description
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset Index idx
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 \begin_inset Index idx
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 Settings ! Date format
44148 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44149 \begin_inset Newline newline
44153 \begin_inset Flex URL
44156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44158 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44164 \begin_inset Newline newline
44167 For example the format
44168 \begin_inset Newline newline
44172 \begin_inset Newline newline
44175 prints the date as day/month/year.
44178 \begin_layout Description
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44184 \begin_inset space ~
44187 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44188 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44191 \begin_layout Description
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44196 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44198 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44200 \begin_inset space ~
44206 For a detailed description see section
44208 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44221 \begin_layout Subsection
44223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44225 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44230 \begin_inset Index idx
44233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44236 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44245 \begin_layout Description
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44255 \begin_inset space ~
44258 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44263 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44284 are used for Cyrillic.
44285 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44298 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44300 sets up in the background.
44301 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44304 \begin_layout Description
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44310 \begin_inset space ~
44313 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44318 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44322 \begin_layout Description
44324 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44336 \begin_inset space ~
44339 options They only have an effect when the program
44343 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44346 \begin_layout Standard
44347 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44348 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44349 manuals of the applications.
44352 \begin_layout Description
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44357 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44358 \begin_inset space ~
44362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44364 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
44371 \begin_layout Description
44373 \begin_inset space ~
44376 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44383 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
44390 \begin_layout Description
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44395 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44402 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
44409 \begin_layout Description
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44414 command Command for the program
44416 Check\SpecialChar TeX
44419 that is described in the section
44421 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
44426 Additional Features
44431 \begin_layout Standard
44432 There are additionally the following options:
44435 \begin_layout Description
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44445 \begin_inset space ~
44449 \begin_inset space ~
44454 \begin_inset space ~
44457 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44475 to separate folders.
44476 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
44478 \begin_inset Index idx
44481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44490 \begin_inset Index idx
44493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44504 \begin_layout Description
44506 \begin_inset space ~
44510 \begin_inset space ~
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44522 \begin_inset space ~
44526 \begin_inset space ~
44529 changes Removes all manually set
44535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44543 dialog when changing the document class.
44546 \begin_layout Section
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44552 \begin_inset Index idx
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44566 \begin_layout Subsection
44568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44570 name "subsec:Converters"
44575 \begin_inset Index idx
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44589 \begin_layout Standard
44590 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44591 from one format to another.
44592 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44593 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44600 \begin_inset space ~
44605 field and press the
44610 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44619 drop-down list, modify the
44623 field and press the
44630 \begin_layout Standard
44633 Converter File Cache
44639 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44641 Maximum Age (in days
44644 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44645 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44648 \begin_layout Standard
44649 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44650 definition, is described in the section
44661 \begin_layout Subsection
44663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44665 name "sec:File-Formats"
44670 \begin_inset Index idx
44673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44682 \begin_inset Index idx
44685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44696 \begin_layout Standard
44697 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
44707 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44710 \begin_layout Standard
44711 You can also define the
44713 Default output format
44715 that is used when you use
44717 View, Update, View Master Document
44721 Update Master Document
44727 menu or the toolbar.
44730 \begin_layout Standard
44731 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44742 \begin_layout Standard
44743 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
44745 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44746 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44747 This is done by specifying a
44752 More about this is described in the section
44763 \begin_layout Chapter
44764 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44766 \begin_inset Index idx
44769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44780 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44787 \begin_layout Standard
44789 \begin_inset space ~
44793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44795 reference "tab:Units"
44799 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44800 and used in this documentation.
44803 \begin_layout Standard
44804 \begin_inset Float table
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44811 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44831 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44839 \begin_inset Tabular
44840 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
44841 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
44842 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44843 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44844 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45050 scaled point (65536
45051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45129 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45202 % of original image width
45207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45518 \begin_layout Chapter
45520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45522 name "chap:Credits"
45529 \begin_layout Standard
45530 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45531 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45534 \begin_layout Itemize
45537 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45540 \begin_layout Itemize
45546 \begin_layout Itemize
45552 \begin_layout Itemize
45558 \begin_layout Itemize
45564 \begin_layout Itemize
45570 \begin_layout Itemize
45576 \begin_layout Itemize
45582 \begin_layout Itemize
45585 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45588 \begin_layout Itemize
45594 \begin_layout Itemize
45600 \begin_layout Itemize
45606 \begin_layout Itemize
45612 \begin_layout Itemize
45618 \begin_layout Itemize
45624 \begin_layout Itemize
45630 \begin_layout Itemize
45636 \begin_layout Itemize
45637 The \SpecialChar LyX
45639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45648 \begin_layout Standard
45649 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45652 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45659 \begin_layout Bibliography
45660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45661 LatexCommand bibitem
45667 The \SpecialChar LyX
45669 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45672 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45677 \begin_inset Newline newline
45681 \begin_inset Flex URL
45684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45686 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45694 \begin_layout Bibliography
45695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45696 LatexCommand bibitem
45697 key "latexcompanion"
45701 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45703 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45704 Companion Second Edition.
45707 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45710 \begin_layout Bibliography
45711 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45712 LatexCommand bibitem
45717 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45720 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45724 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45727 \begin_layout Bibliography
45728 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45729 LatexCommand bibitem
45737 : A Document Preparation System.
45740 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45743 \begin_layout Bibliography
45744 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45745 LatexCommand bibitem
45754 The \SpecialChar TeX
45758 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45761 \begin_layout Bibliography
45762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45763 LatexCommand bibitem
45768 The \SpecialChar TeX
45770 \begin_inset Newline newline
45774 \begin_inset Flex URL
45777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45779 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45787 \begin_layout Bibliography
45788 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45789 LatexCommand bibitem
45794 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45796 \begin_inset Newline newline
45800 \begin_inset Flex URL
45803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45813 \begin_layout Bibliography
45814 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45815 LatexCommand bibitem
45821 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45823 name "Documentation"
45824 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45830 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45834 \begin_inset Newline newline
45838 \begin_inset Flex URL
45841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45843 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45851 \begin_layout Bibliography
45852 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45853 LatexCommand bibitem
45859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45861 name "Documentation"
45862 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45866 how to use the program
45868 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45872 \begin_inset Newline newline
45876 \begin_inset Flex URL
45879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45881 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45889 \begin_layout Bibliography
45890 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45891 LatexCommand bibitem
45897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45899 name "Documentation"
45900 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45909 \begin_inset Newline newline
45913 \begin_inset Flex URL
45916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45926 \begin_layout Bibliography
45927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45928 LatexCommand bibitem
45929 key "makeindex-man"
45934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45937 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
45946 \begin_inset Newline newline
45950 \begin_inset Flex URL
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
45963 \begin_layout Bibliography
45964 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45965 LatexCommand bibitem
45971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45973 name "Documentation"
45974 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45983 \begin_inset Newline newline
45987 \begin_inset Flex URL
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45992 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46000 \begin_layout Bibliography
46001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46002 LatexCommand bibitem
46008 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46010 name "Documentation"
46011 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46015 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46017 \begin_inset Newline newline
46021 \begin_inset Flex URL
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46034 \begin_layout Bibliography
46035 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46036 LatexCommand bibitem
46042 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46044 name "Documentation"
46045 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46049 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46055 \begin_inset Index idx
46058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46062 -packages ! caption
46068 \begin_inset Newline newline
46072 \begin_inset Flex URL
46075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46077 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46085 \begin_layout Bibliography
46086 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46087 LatexCommand bibitem
46093 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46095 name "Documentation"
46096 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46100 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46106 \begin_inset Index idx
46109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46113 -packages ! enumitem
46119 \begin_inset Newline newline
46123 \begin_inset Flex URL
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46136 \begin_layout Bibliography
46137 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46138 LatexCommand bibitem
46144 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46146 name "Documentation"
46147 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46151 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46157 \begin_inset Index idx
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 -packages ! fancyhdr
46170 \begin_inset Newline newline
46174 \begin_inset Flex URL
46177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46179 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46187 \begin_layout Bibliography
46188 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46189 LatexCommand bibitem
46195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46197 name "Documentation"
46198 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46202 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46208 \begin_inset Index idx
46211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46215 -packages ! hyperref
46221 \begin_inset Newline newline
46225 \begin_inset Flex URL
46228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46230 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46238 \begin_layout Bibliography
46239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46240 LatexCommand bibitem
46246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46248 name "Documentation"
46249 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46253 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46259 \begin_inset Index idx
46262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46266 -packages ! nomencl
46272 \begin_inset Newline newline
46276 \begin_inset Flex URL
46279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46281 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46289 \begin_layout Bibliography
46290 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46291 LatexCommand bibitem
46297 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46299 name "Documentation"
46300 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46304 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46310 \begin_inset Index idx
46313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46317 -packages ! prettyref
46323 \begin_inset Newline newline
46327 \begin_inset Flex URL
46330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46340 \begin_layout Bibliography
46341 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46342 LatexCommand bibitem
46348 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46350 name "Documentation"
46351 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46355 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46361 \begin_inset Index idx
46364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46368 -packages ! refstyle
46374 \begin_inset Newline newline
46378 \begin_inset Flex URL
46381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46383 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46391 \begin_layout Bibliography
46392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46393 LatexCommand bibitem
46399 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46402 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46406 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46408 \begin_inset Newline newline
46412 \begin_inset Flex URL
46415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46417 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46425 \begin_layout Bibliography
46426 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46427 LatexCommand bibitem
46433 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46436 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46440 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46442 \begin_inset Newline newline
46446 \begin_inset Flex URL
46449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46451 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46459 \begin_layout Bibliography
46460 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46461 LatexCommand bibitem
46467 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46470 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46474 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46475 for Cyrillic languages:
46476 \begin_inset Newline newline
46480 \begin_inset Flex URL
46483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46485 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46493 \begin_layout Bibliography
46494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46495 LatexCommand bibitem
46501 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46504 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46508 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46510 \begin_inset Newline newline
46514 \begin_inset Flex URL
46517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46519 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46527 \begin_layout Bibliography
46528 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46529 LatexCommand bibitem
46535 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46538 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46542 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46544 \begin_inset Newline newline
46548 \begin_inset Flex URL
46551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46561 \begin_layout Bibliography
46562 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46563 LatexCommand bibitem
46569 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46572 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46576 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46578 \begin_inset Newline newline
46582 \begin_inset Flex URL
46585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46587 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46595 \begin_layout Bibliography
46596 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46597 LatexCommand bibitem
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46606 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46610 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46612 \begin_inset Newline newline
46616 \begin_inset Flex URL
46619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46621 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46629 \begin_layout Bibliography
46630 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46631 LatexCommand bibitem
46637 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46640 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46644 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46646 \begin_inset Newline newline
46650 \begin_inset Flex URL
46653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46655 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46663 \begin_layout Bibliography
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46665 LatexCommand bibitem
46671 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46674 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46678 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46680 \begin_inset Newline newline
46684 \begin_inset Flex URL
46687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46689 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46697 \begin_layout Bibliography
46698 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46699 LatexCommand bibitem
46705 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46708 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46712 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46714 \begin_inset Newline newline
46718 \begin_inset Flex URL
46721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46723 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46731 \begin_layout Bibliography
46732 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46733 LatexCommand bibitem
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46742 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46746 about new features in
46752 \begin_inset Newline newline
46756 \begin_inset Flex URL
46759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46761 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46769 \begin_layout Standard
46770 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46804 \begin_inset Note Note
46807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46816 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46817 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46818 bibliography is the second one:
46826 \begin_layout Standard
46827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46828 LatexCommand bibtex
46829 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
46830 options "../biblio/alphadin"
46837 \begin_layout Standard
46838 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46842 \begin_layout Standard
46843 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46844 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46850 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46851 LatexCommand printindex